Quick viewing(Text Mode)

TO BE OR NOT to BE INTIMIDATED? That Is the Question

TO BE OR NOT to BE INTIMIDATED? That Is the Question

mnit$$0.qxd 8/14/06 1:35 PM Page b mnit$$0.qxd 8/14/06 1:30 PM Page i

TO BE OR NOT TO BE INTIMIDATED? That Is the Question. mnit$$0.qxd 8/14/06 1:30 PM Page ii mnit$$0.qxd 8/14/06 1:30 PM Page iii

TO BE OR NOT TO BE INTIMIDATED? That Is the Question.

Robert Ringer

TORTOISE PRESS, INC. Wilmington, Delaware mnit$$0.qxd 8/14/06 1:30 PM Page iv

Copyright © 2006 by Robert Ringer

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of the publisher.

Tortoise Press, Inc. 2711 Centerville Road Wilmington, Delaware 19808

www.robertringer.com

Printed in the United States of America mnit$$0.qxd 8/11/06 2:29 PM Page v

Dedicated to the millions of resilient souls who took to heart Peter Finch’s battle cry in the movie Network—“We’re mad as hell, and we’re not going to take it anymore!”—by adopting it as their mantra and drawing a line in the sand against the intimidators of the world.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$0.qxd 8/11/06 2:29 PM Page vi

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$0.qxd 8/11/06 2:29 PM Page vii

Contents

Preface 1

Introduction 3

Chapter 1 Shattering the Myths 6

Chapter 2 Replacing the Myths 16

Chapter 3 Passing My Entrance Exam at Screw U. 26

Chapter 4 My Three Unforgettable Professors at Screw U. 36

Chapter 5 Type Number Three Is Sincerely Sorry That He Grabbed Your Chips, but the Result Is Just the Same As If He Were Glad 40

Chapter 6 Type Number One Isn’t Sorry That He Grabbed Your Chips, Because He Warned You Ahead of Time How He Plays the Game 56

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$0.qxd 8/11/06 2:29 PM Page viii

Chapter 7 Type Number Two Isn’t Sorry That He GrabbedYour Chips, Because––In Spite of His Assurances to the Contrary––That Was His Intention from the Outset 63

Chapter 8 My Senior Year at Screw U. 72

Chapter 9 My Graduation from Screw U. 86

Chapter 10 Using Posture Power to Get the Ball 97

Chapter 11 Advancing the Ball to Midfield 117

Chapter 12 Reaching the Opponent’s 20-Yard Line 128

Chapter 13 Scoring 137

Chapter 14 It Doesn’t Count Until the Points Are on the Scoreboard 153

Chapter 15 The Return of The Tortoise 159

Chapter 16 The Return of The Tortoise: Part II 175

Chapter 17 The Tortoise Dons His Hare Costume 182

Chapter 18 The Tortoise Returns to True Form 198

Chapter 19 The Ultimate Insurance Policy 209

Chapter 20 Sticking with a Winning Formula 214

Chapter 21 Answer: Not to Be Intimidated 220

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$0.qxd 8/11/06 2:29 PM Page ix

Robert Ringer is often referred to as “the thinking person’s mentor” because of his emphasis on reason and logic. He is the author of eight books, including three #1 best sellers, two of which have been listed by The New York Times among the 15 bestselling motivational books of all time.

Ringer has appeared on numerous national talk shows, including The Tonight Show, Today, Good Morning America, The Montel Williams Show, ABC News Nightline, and The Charlie Show. In addition, he has been the subject of feature articles in such major publications as Time, People, The Wall Street Journal, Fortune, Barron's, and The New York Times.

Comments and questions for Robert Ringer, as well as inquiries regarding his availability for speaking engagements, may be sent to: [email protected]

Tortoise Press, Inc. also publishes Robert Ringer’s e-letter, A Voice of Sanity in an Insane World. To sign up for your free sub- scription, visit: www.robertringer.com

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$0.qxd 8/11/06 2:29 PM Page x

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 1

Preface

f you picked up this book in the hopes that it might explain Ihow to get ahead in life by intimidating others, I’m afraid you’ve made a bad choice. If that’s your aim, you might find The Communist Manifesto, Mein Kampf, or Mao Tse-Tung on Guerrilla Warfare more to your liking. As you will see on the following pages, To Be or Not to Be Intimidated? is a guide to de- fending yourself against intimidating people. Be forewarned: More often than not, those who feign indig- nation over the mere mention of the word intimidation are the very people who are most likely to use it against you. So, make no mistake about it, what I have to say in this book irritates a lot of people—especially self-righteous, self-anointed saints who are masters at intimidating others. They would prefer that most peo- ple not understand that intimidation is a common thread that 1 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 2

2 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

runs through every business situation and a crucial factor that decides the outcome of many of life’s most important events. At the top of the list of master intimidators disguised as (self- anointed) saints are chest-pounding critics, syndicated colum- nists, and TV commentators, ever on the alert for an opportunity to seize the moral high ground. Rest assured that authors, film- makers, and public figures in general find it a distracting but significant challenge to fend off their intimidating mischaracter- izations and misleading comments. What is a tortoise to do about such a relentless onslaught of distortion and truth-twisting, of having to listen to “the truth you’ve spoken twisted by knaves to make a trap for fools?” Ayn Rand offered perhaps the most rational solution for dealing with slanderers when she said, “Freedom comes from seeing the ig- norance of your critics and discovering the emptiness of their virtue.” Thankfully, I long ago adopted her advice, and highly rec- ommend that you do the same with regard to those who would try to misrepresent either your words or actions.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 3

Introduction

he principles set forth on the following pages do not nec- Tessarily represent the way I or anyone else may wish the world to be, but the way it actually is. In other words, it is a work based on reality, particularly as it relates to human nature. Thus, the essence of the philosophy contained herein should serve you well regardless of how the world around you may change in the years ahead. Though technology continually changes, human nature re- mains constant. People, by and large, are pretty much the same today as they were in the times of Confucius, Buddha, Jesus, and Mohammed, and it’s a safe bet that they’ll be pretty much the same 2,000 years from now. For example, Jesus, above all else, crusaded against hypocrisy. But today, 2,000 years later, can any- 3 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 4

4 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

one seriously say they see evidence that hypocrisy is on the decline? Judging from the way most people talk and act, one is led to wonder if a resistance to reality is genetically programmed into a majority of the human species. Perhaps reality was only meant to be embraced elsewhere in our universe. However, unless you know how to build a spaceship—and fly it—I would suggest that it would be much easier for you to join that small minority of people on Planet Earth who are vigilant when it comes to recog- nizing and acknowledging reality. Unfortunately, most people choose to live in a world of delu- sions, stubbornly refusing to accept the unforgiving realities of life no matter how great the evidence to support such realities may be. Why? Because truth is often painful, and people simply do not like pain. My position, however, is that truth, by its very nature, is always preferable to falsehood, regardless of how un- pleasant it may be. Self-delusion leads to certain failure, and fail- ure leads to misery. What’s so noble about promoting misery? Sure, I sometimes think that perhaps it would be easier to yield to the temptation to become an ostrich and simply hide my head in the sands of unreality. In the end, though, I always man- age to pull myself back toward reality, because I’d rather go to my grave a battered realist than a bloodied ostrich. And rest assured that battering is an integral part of the journey—no matter who you are or what you choose to believe. As you will see, to a great extent this book is an autobio- graphical work centered around my years as a real estate broker. However, subsequent events have repeatedly demonstrated to my satisfaction that the lessons learned during my years in the real estate business apply not only to all other kinds of busi- ness endeavors, but to virtually all other aspects of life as well. Unfortunately, anyone who misses this central point misses the book. Finally, a warning. The following pages are not suitable for weak stomachs. The painful tales that lie ahead may cause you to

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 5

Introduction 5

recall equally unpleasant experiences from your own life. With that caveat, I suggest that you lock away all sharp objects and place the Pepto Bismol within easy reach before commencing Chapter 1.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 6

Chapter 1

Shattering the Myths

he overriding message in many motivation and how-to Tbooks is that if a person just maintains a positive mental attitude and works long, hard hours, he ultimately will succeed. A nice thought, to be sure, but one that borders more on mysticism than reality. How many times have you seen a person get all charged up after reading a motivation or self-help book, then, after the initial high wears off, become more frustrated than ever when he* realizes that he is no closer to achieving his goals than before reading

*Because I find it cumbersome to use hybrid pronouns such as “his/hers,” and am op- posed to debasing the English language by mixing singular nouns and pronouns with plural pronouns such as “they,” I have, for convenience only, chosen to use the mas- culine gender throughout this book in most instances where the neuter has not been employed. 6 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 7

Shattering the Myths 7

the book? Perhaps it’s even happened to you. To be sure, I experi- enced this phenomenon many times earlier in my career. There’s no question that the illusions created by the hyper- bole and enthusiastic verbiage contained in many motivation and self-help books can be very uplifting, but almost without excep- tion they fail to address the realities that confront a person when he ventures into the Businessworld Jungle and comes face to face with its indigenous predators. When these face-to-face confrontations occur, the synthet- ically motivated individual becomes confused and frustrated when finding, to his dismay, that Jungle predators don’t have much in- terest in his positive mental attitude or work ethic. Unfortu- nately, this harsh reality often causes the individual to cling to his favorite success book’s assurances that ultimately success will come if he just toughs it out and adheres to some simple rules. Sort of like waiting for one’s reward in the afterlife. Like millions of other people, I, too, fell into the trap of be- lieving that my great reward would ultimately come if I just fo- cused on working hard and displaying a positive mental attitude. However, my rewards were not forthcoming until I invested a great deal of time and mental energy into carefully analyzing my frustrating failures of the past and developing the courage to al- low truth and logic to prevail. The turning point for me came one day when I was having a discussion with a financially successful acquaintance of mine (“Vern”) who headed up his own insurance agency. Vern had al- ways intrigued me, because outwardly he seemed like the world’s least likely candidate to become a success at anything, let alone a successful salesman. He was quiet to the point of being shy, and was very awkward in his mannerisms. In addition, he gave no outward indication of harboring a positive mental attitude, and worked fewer hours than anyone I had ever known. Vern’s success shattered the archetypal image of the “super salesman” I had held in my mind from the time I was a boy. It helped me to better understand why so many individuals whom

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 8

8 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

others had characterized as great salesmen often lacked the re- sults to back up their reputations. I now realize that when a per- son is tagged as a “great salesman,” all too often it is the very reason that he is not successful at his craft. The problem is that the individual with a mega-reputation as a super salesman poses a threat to a prospect the moment he enters the room. Over a pe- riod of time, I developed a knack for spotting these paper-tiger salespeople, and came to refer to them fondly as the “all show, no dough” brigade; i.e., they were more successful in attracting at- tention than getting results. During one of my conversations with Vern, I pointed out that the methods espoused in many so-called success books did not seem to work in actual practice, and asked his opinion as to why this was so. His answer was quite surprising. Vern explained that successful people rarely know the real reasons for their suc- cess, though they themselves almost always believe they know. When I expressed my curiosity as to why a person would be un- aware of how he had achieved his own success, he said it was a matter of one’s being too close to the trees of his business to see the forest of his success. Absolutely fascinating insight, and one that I have never forgotten. With Vern’s intriguing observation in mind, over a period of time I concluded that there were a number of reasons why suc- cessful people, as well as authors of many self-help books, tend to espouse unworkable solutions. These include, among others:

1. Success has a tendency to breed self-righteousness, which all too often causes a person to overemphasize, to the exclusion of other crucial factors, such societal favorites as positive mental attitude and work ethic.

2. The media, government, and academia are relentless in their intimidating efforts to try to make financially successful peo- ple feel guilty. As a result, those at the high end of the finan- cial spectrum are often self-conscious about their wealth and

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 9

Shattering the Myths 9

tend to repress the realities of how they achieved it. More to the point, they are concerned about little inconveniences such as being burned at the stake by the envious masses.

3. Finally, many authors of business, self-help, and motivation books deliberately withhold, for commercial reasons, the re- alities of what it takes to succeed. It’s much easier, and far more popular, to sell success myths that people have been weaned on since their earliest days in grade school than to say things that incur the wrath of society’s absolute moralists who are forever roaming the earth searching for perceived bad guys. Aspiring authors of self-help books quickly learn to heed Publishing Rule Number One: Reality is a hard sell. Shooting truth messengers is considered a noble occupation in a West- ern culture turned upside down.

I want to make it clear that, notwithstanding anything I have said up to this point, there is no question in my mind that both a positive mental attitude and good work ethic are important to one’s success. The problem arises when one relies solely on these two virtues to the exclusion of all other factors. Having a positive mental attitude and good work ethic are two traits that are so often misunderstood that I feel it is important to discuss them in more detail before moving on.

Positive Mental Attitude. It has been my observation that most people have a distorted concept of what constitutes a true posi- tive mental attitude. “Just fake it till you make it” are perhaps the most damaging motivational words ever spoken, yet I have heard this phrase repeated by positive-mental-attitude enthusi- asts many times over the years. In reality, you can’t acquire a positive mental attitude simply by standing in front of a mirror and reciting self-energizing slo- gans, force-feeding your mind with positive thoughts, or heartily shaking people’s hands (while grinning from ear to ear) and loudly

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:43 PM Page 10

10 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

exclaiming, “Great!” when asked how things are going for you. This kind of synthetic positive mental attitude cannot bring about success. By contrast, a real positive mental attitude can play a major role in one’s success, but such an attitude is a result of being pre- pared. In other words, a true positive mental attitude is possible only through one’s having the ammunition to back it up. You de- velop a positive mental attitude by being good at what you do, by being prepared, by understanding the realities of what it takes to succeed, and by having the self-discipline to base your actions on those realities. Hence, the success cycle is self-perpetual: The more pre- pared a person is, the more confident he becomes, which trans- lates into a natural positive mental attitude, which in turn increases his chances of success. You can set all the goals you want, but I can guarantee that you won’t achieve them if you’re unprepared. A positive mental attitude requires preparation, and the two of them work in concert to help you achieve your goals. But even after I concluded that a positive mental attitude was not a quality one could synthesize, I still found myself ven- turing into the Businessworld Jungle (specifically, at that point in time, the real estate brokerage area of the Jungle), sincerely be- lieving that, because of my preparation, I would succeed in clos- ing every deal, only to end up having my head handed to me on a platter because of realities over which I had little or no control. As I struck out on one sale after another, it became clear to me that it was just a matter of time until my self-esteem—and my self-confidence along with it—was shattered. The result was con- fusion and doubt. Then, at some point in time, it occurred to me that even though I possessed a reasonable degree of self-confidence and felt I was prepared, I was lacking a method for sustaining my positive mental attitude in the face of ongoing disappointments. This con- clusion evolved into one of my earliest theories, and prompted a major shift upward in my career.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/14/06 2:31 PM Page 11

Shattering the Myths 11

I dubbed it the Theory of Sustenance of a Positive Attitude through the Assumption of a Negative Result, which I recently revised and renamed the Theory of Next: The key to maintaining a positive mental attitude is to recognize that no one deal is that important. The person who possesses a true positive mental atti- tude also possesses the power to say “Next!” and quickly move on to the next deal when things don’t work out. The reason it’s okay if a deal falls through is because day-to- day “failure” is an integral part of long-term success. So, part and parcel to a true positive mental attitude is the mental toughness to move quickly on to the next deal. Anticipating continual short-term setbacks has the positive effect of deflating their im- pact on one’s mental state when they occur, which in turn paves the way for long-term success. This realistic approach to life simply takes into account circumstances beyond one’s control, and PMA one-trick ponies seem totally incapable of grasping this obvious fact of life. If you still have a pulse rate and are over 21 years of age, surely personal experience has demonstrated to you that no matter how well pre- pared you are, most situations in life don’t work out as planned. In real estate, for example, a deal can blow up over any one of a seemingly infinite number of unforeseen obstacles—e.g., un- wanted third-party opinions, ulterior motives on the part of the buyer or seller, or even a change in the health or marital status of one of the parties. Consequently, I ultimately concluded that the only way to guard against having my self-confidence and belief shattered was to acknowledge the reality that, like it or not, most deals do not close. I reasoned that the only way I could sustain a true posi- tive mental attitude was to come to grips with this reality and make certain that I was always mentally prepared to move on to the next deal. Did it work? Spectacularly. My income skyrocketed during the first year that I implemented the essence of this theory, but it’s important to point out that the deals I closed during that year

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 12

12 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

represented only a small fraction of the total number of deals I worked on. In essence, I simply accessed the power of the law of averages. Also, it’s noteworthy that I worked just as hard, and in many instances harder, on the scores of deals that didn’t close as I did on the ones that were successful. Given these realities, there is no question in my mind that without my firm belief in the Theory of Sustenance of a Positive Attitude through the Assump- tion of a Negative Result, I would not have had the confidence and persistence to press on after seeing one sale after another go up in smoke. I guess you might say that it was a paradox of sorts in that I prepared myself for long-term success by bracing myself for short-term failure. I again emphasize that this philosophy works only if you are prepared to succeed. It does not work if you simply use it as an excuse to fail in a situation where it may have been possible to succeed had you tried harder and/or been more persistent. With this unorthodox perspective indelibly stamped on my forebrain, I was able to view each negative result as a learning ex- perience and studiously focus on extracting the lessons learned from each experience. Then, of utmost importance, I simply de- leted the negative result from my mind. When it comes to situa- tions that don’t work out, whether in my business or personal life, my motto remains: “Next!” Forget about it, move quickly on to the next deal, and let the law of averages work its wonders.

Working long, hard hours. As to the myth about working long, hard hours, I came to the conclusion that the words long and hard are relative. What one person considers to be working hard, an- other may think of as coasting. What one person considers to be long hours may, by someone else’s standards, be just getting by. The whole concept of hard work, then, tends to be subjective. It wasn’t so much that I scorned hard work; I didn’t—and still don’t. I simply recognized that I should not allow myself to be intimi- dated by those who overemphasize hard work. Subsequent obser-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 13

Shattering the Myths 13

vations through the years have, in fact, convinced me that I work harder and longer hours than most people who drone on endlessly about their labors. Since “working long, hard hours” is a relative phrase, it logi- cally follows that there is no set number of hours per day that one has to work in order to succeed. The amount of time you must in- vest depends upon your individual ability and the magnitude of your goals. For example, a person of greater ability who desires to earn $100,000 a year might be able to do so by working four hours a day, while someone of lesser ability who wants to earn $50,000 a year might find it necessary to work 10 hours a day to accom- plish his objectives. Also, there is a point of diminishing returns when it comes to putting in long hours. When energy is continuously expended over a long period of time, both the body and brain decrease their output, quantitatively and qualitatively. Naturally, everyone’s body and brain have different tolerances, but nonetheless there is a point at which results begin to diminish in relation to effort expended. In fact, there’s a point at which one’s results actually become negative. It’s an old axiom in football that a tired player is a player in danger of being injured. Likewise, a person who works too long at one stretch is in danger of making costly mistakes. Mental and physical fatigue are natural enemies of anyone who aspires to great success. My answer to the “working long, hard hours” adage became known as the Uncle George Theory, which states: If your main focus is on keeping your nose to the grindstone and working long, hard hours, you’re guaranteed to get only one thing in re- turn: Old! One need only look at the empirical evidence to confirm the soundness of this theory. Have you not seen, with your own eyes, that working long, hard hours does not by itself assure a person of success? In this regard, I always think of my Uncle George, who served as my inspiration for the Uncle George Theory. This

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 14

14 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

kindly little owned a corner grocery store and worked 14- to 16-hour days all his life. He never succeeded in getting rich, but he did get old. This didn’t take any great amount of insight on my part, just good eyesight. I could see, with my own eyes, the hours and effort my uncle put in every day, and I could also see that it never got him anywhere. Everyone has an Uncle George. Of course, your Uncle George may be a cousin, a brother, or perhaps your own father—someone who has worked very hard over the years, kept his nose to the grindstone, yet never achieved any great degree of success. When- ever you have witnessed such a sad drama playing out, you were observing, firsthand, the inherent truth in the Uncle George Theory. Perhaps you’re thinking that the world is unjust, and perhaps you’re right. All I know is that I didn’t lay down the framework of reality; I just learned to acknowledge it. The reality of the Uncle George Theory is self-evident to anyone who has a serious desire to discover truth. All that is required to accurately observe this fact of life is intellectual honesty. By acknowledging this truth, I was able to make it work for me rather than allowing myself to be to intimidated by others into believing that hard work alone would make me successful. The same goes here for what I said about having a positive mental attitude, i.e., that hard work does not prevent one from being successful; on the contrary, as previously stated, a good work ethic is crucial to success. The point of the Uncle George Theory is that hard work alone does not assure one of success. I never had a problem with working long, hard hours, but I didn’t start making any serious money until I supplemented my hard work with the realities discussed on the pages of this book. By gaining an understanding of what a positive mental atti- tude means in real-life terms, and by realizing that working long, hard hours doesn’t guarantee success, my mind became a clean slate that was open to new ideas—ideas based on reality rather than myths. And in order to construct a workable success phi-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 15

Shattering the Myths 15

losophy, one that would be able to stand up to the punishment of real-world experiences, I knew I would have to build a strong foundation to replace the old one that had not worked in actual practice. To accomplish this, I undertook a serious study of my own past experiences. I tried to be painfully honest in identifying the factors that had contributed to my failures, as well as those that had led to success. I then began piecing together an overall phi- losophy based on my conclusions. Though there have been no fundamental changes in my philosophy through the years, the natural process of maturation assures that I will continually find the need to fine tune it. I never cease to be amazed at how each new experience teaches me a new, often subtle, twist that I hadn’t thought of before. It continually reminds me how exciting it is to grow and evolve intellectually to the very end of one’s journey through life.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 16

Chapter 2

Replacing the Myths

our of the theories discussed in this chapter represent the Fcornerstones of my reality-based philosophy, and are an- chored to a fifth theory that I look upon as the bedrock of my philosophy. I use the word bedrock, because without it I surely would have spent the rest of my life as an intimidatee. The bedrock theory I am referring to is the Theory of Reality, which states: Reality is neither the way you wish things to be nor the way they appear to be, but the way they actually are. Either you acknowledge reality and use it to your benefit, or it will auto- matically work against you. This sounds so elementary at first blush that you might question why it would deserve the exalted status of being the bedrock my entire philosophy. Yet, no matter how simplistic it 16 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 17

Replacing the Myths 17

may sound, it has been my observation that while most people pay lip service to the importance of correctly perceiving reality, very few of them demonstrate, through their actions, that they’re really serious about taking reality into account in their daily lives. In my opinion, the single biggest cause of failure lies in the inability to recognize and/or refusal to acknowledge reality. Like a majority of people, I spent many years of my life cling- ing to idealistic beliefs about how the world works. For years I ac- cepted traditional nostrums and confused the way I would have liked things to be with the way they really were. In retrospect, I am amazed at how I managed to limp along year after year, refus- ing to acknowledge reality in the face of one ugly ending after another. I witnessed many people stubbornly adhering to conven- tional success rules, only to continually have their fingers sev- ered when they reached for their chips. Their wish was that these rules would work; the reality was that they did not. I myself had a masochistic tendency to focus on the other person’s best inter- est, particularly in business dealings, naively clinging to the be- lief that my benevolent attitude would be appreciated and that I would be handsomely rewarded. At best, I ended up with a hand- ful of air; at worst, I got a financial slap in the face. My wish was that I would be justly rewarded for my caring attitude; the reality was that I was not. Like millions of people before me, I went into one deal after another on just a handshake, believing the other party’s assur- ances that a handshake was all that I needed—only to have him end up beating me over the head with his other hand! My wish was that I needed only a handshake; the reality was that I needed a clear, written agreement. I repeatedly listened to attorneys insist that they weren’t deal- killers—that they weren’t like those “typical attorneys” who concentrated on finding, rather than solving, problems—only to witness those same non-deal-killing attorneys blow up one deal after another. My wish was that each new attorney who

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 18

18 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

proclaimed himself to be different from other (deal-killing) attor- neys would show, through his actions, that he wasn’t a deal- killer; the reality, however, was that the vast majority of such attorneys ended up being worse than most of their brethren. I, like most people in the Businessworld Jungle, wished that the game of business took place on a nursery school playground; the reality, however, was that it was played in a vicious jungle. I concluded that I must either accept that reality or, for my own well-being, give up all my worldly possessions (a bicycle, clock radio, and tattered Mickey Mantle baseball card) and become a monk. I opted for the former. In addition to people confusing their wishes with the way things really are, there’s another important factor that can blind a person to reality: illusion. It’s a lot more difficult and pain- ful to recognize and deal with illusions than wishes, but one gut-wrenching experience after another forced me to became a hard-nosed realist. As a result, I ultimately made it a habit to re- lentlessly probe every deal for illusions, especially if a deal looked too good to be true.

THE FOUR CORNERSTONES

Cornerstone No. 1—Theory of Relativity: In order to settle on a rational course of action (or inaction), one must first weigh all pertinent facts in a relative light and carefully define his terms. Let’s take honesty as an example. Everyone defines honesty to conveniently fit his own actions. Question: Have you ever met a person who admits to being dishonest? Second question: Have you ever known a dishonest person? I would probably be on pretty safe ground if I wagered that your answer to the first ques- tion was negative and your answer to the second question was affirmative. Since I had dealt with many people whom I considered to be dishonest, yet had never known anyone who admitted to being

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 19

Replacing the Myths 19

dishonest, it was clear to me that a term like honesty was both relative and subjective. In fact, every human being interprets everything in life to suit himself. I’m not just talking about other people; I’m talking about you and me as well. We can’t help it; we’re human. Unlike animals, human beings have the ability to intellectualize and interpret, so the key issue becomes objectivity versus subjectivity. Either through genetics or environment, or both, some human beings are better than others when it comes to being objective, and such individuals are much more likely to be rational in their interpretation of events. In any case, interpreting events with a bias toward our own well-being is a perfectly natu- ral human trait. Once I recognized that honesty was a subjective, relative characteristic, I realized that for years I had been operating under the delusion that there were only two types of people in the world: honest and dishonest. I now understood that a person could only be honest or dishonest relative to the facts in a given situation, or relative to some individual’s personal moral stan- dards. That being the case, if someone tells me that an individual I’m dealing with is dishonest, it’s meaningless to me. I want him to carefully define what he means by dishonest in that particular instance so I can then decide if his definition is relevant to my objective. As another example of relativity, I pointed out in Chapter 1 that what is hard work to one person might be semi-retirement to another. Hard work, in other words, is a relative notion. Are you working hard relative to how hard you usually work or relative to how hard someone else works? A phrase such as “working long, hard hours” has no meaning unless it is clearly defined by the user. A final example of relativity is to be seen in the word suc- cess. There is no such thing as absolute success. You can only be successful relative to some standard, whether that standard be based on your own goals or someone else’s achievements. When a person talks to me about success, I might have a completely

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 20

20 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

different mental picture of success than he does. In order for us to have a rational discussion, he must first define what he means by success. It’s important not to allow yourself to be intimidated by vague or subjective words and statements that are meaningful only when examined in the clear light of relativity.

Cornerstone No. 2—Theory of Relevance: No matter how true something may be or how much it may please you, the primary factor to take into consideration is how relevant it is to your main objective. Success results from focusing primarily on projects that are relevant to achieving one’s objectives. Early in my career, I had a habit of expending enormous amounts of time and energy on proj- ects that were, so to speak, side issues. Ultimately, I developed the habit of trying to qualify each potential activity by first ask- ing myself whether or not it would bring me closer to achieving my goals. If the answer was no, I eliminated it or put it on the back burner. For example, once I became knowledgeable about the rele- vant factors in closing real estate sales, it became clear to me that the seller, in particular, had a tendency to dwell on qualities of his property that were not relevant to the value of his property. A seller would often emphasize how much it had cost him to build his apartment development, office building, or shopping center. While I may have had empathy for him in this regard, his cost of construction had no effect whatsoever on the prospective buyer’s determination of the value of his property. If the seller had spent twice as much to build an apartment development as he should have, that was his problem, not the buyer’s. The buyer of income- producing properties was primarily interested in cash flow, and had little if any interest in the seller’s cost of construction. Another example was when a seller would try to impress me with what an honest person he was, and thus there was no reason to worry about my commission. Needless to say, a discussion of his

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 21

Replacing the Myths 21

honesty wasn’t relevant; what was relevant was whether or not he was willing to put into writing what we had agreed upon with regard to my commission. A discussion of honesty, then, is not only relative, but also irrelevant when it comes to business deal- ings. “Trust me” has become something of a cliché comedy line in the Businessworld Jungle. Note that I did not say that honesty is not relevant, but that a discussion of honesty is not relevant. In other words, parties to a transaction need not waste their time trying to impress each other with their honesty, as such time could be more efficiently employed working on a written agreement. In business, a written agreement is high on the list of relevant factors. As a final illustration of the Theory of Relevance, whenever a seller wanted me to lower my commission (which was virtually 100 percent of the time) because he “hadn’t realized how many additional expenses” he was going to have at the closing, that was not a relevant factor from my standpoint. Sure, I may have been a good Samaritan and had empathy for the seller in such a situa- tion, but that still didn’t make his problem relevant the commis- sion we had agreed upon. In fact, it was no more relevant than if I had proclaimed that I needed more money than our agreement called for, and that I would like my commission to be increased. How many sellers do you think would react favorably to that kind of logic? The only relevant factor was what our written agreement stated—period. In becoming adept at recognizing what was and was not rele- vant, I found that it was not only important to try to keep buyers and sellers from drifting onto irrelevant tangents, but to keep my own attention focused on relevant factors. I became determined that I would not waste time and effort on issues that had little or nothing to do with my earning, and receiving, commissions.

Cornerstone No. 3—Mortality Theory: Given that your time on earth is limited, it makes good sense to aim high and move fast. When my participation in the game of life ends, I don’t want

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 22

22 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

to be caught begging for an extra inning, for one more chance to grab the brass ring. The fact is that I’ve never known a person who was given an extra inning. Most people block from their con- scious minds the reality that they’re going to die, and in a rela- tively short period of time at that. I didn’t like facing this reality any more than does anyone else, but I finally did so after the Theory of Reality became firmly entrenched in my thinking. As a result, I quit hiding my head in the fantasy sands of eter- nal life and faced the reality that I was as mortal as every person who has ever lived on this planet. I figured that, with some luck, I might be around for another 50 years or so. By the same token, circumstances beyond my control could reduce my secular visit to a matter of months, days, hours, or even minutes. There was simply no way of knowing. If there is something beyond our worldly existence, what a great bonus that will be. However, I had no way of knowing for certain that there was anything beyond life on earth, so I decided to base my actions on the assumption that this time around would be my only shot. I made up my mind that I was not going to squander—because of fear, intimidation, or any other reason— what might be my only opportunity to win at the game of life. In the event I had only one life to live, I figured I had better get on with it as quickly as possible.

Cornerstone No. 4—Ice Ball Theory: Given the apparent, ulti- mate fate of the earth and universe, it is vain and nonsensical to take oneself too seriously. I call this the Ice Ball Theory as a result of an ominous de- scription of the earth’s future that I read some years ago. The au- explained that our sun is slowly burning out, and that in about 50 billion years it will be completely extinguished. When that occurs, the earth will be nothing but a frozen ball of ice. Ac- companying the explanation was a chilling illustration of what the earth might look like at that time.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 23

Replacing the Myths 23

As ominous as the explanation and illustration were, I came to the conclusion that it was just another reality of life, that there was absolutely nothing I could do about it, and that, in light of this very long-term reality, the immediate problems plaguing me—particularly in the Businessworld Jungle—were so insignifi- cant as to make me feel like an ant. The reality from my vantage point was that 50 billion years from now, when the earth is noth- ing but an ice ball, my problems of today will be too insignificant to have even been recorded. Indeed, there would undoubtedly not even be a record of the entire century in which I had lived most of my life. The Ice Ball Theory is the flip side of the Mortality Theory coin. While on the one hand it makes sense to “go for it” in the time you have left on earth, the Ice Ball Theory eliminates stress and makes it possible for you to enjoy your quest for success. In fact, as most successful people have discovered, it’s the striving and struggling for success, rather than success itself, that bring about the greatest amount of joy. Having this kind of mind-set puts you at a decided advantage over opponents who tend to view every deal as life or death. Stressed-out individuals press too hard for results at crucial mo- ments, while you, by contrast, are able to calmly maintain your objectivity. And the harder someone presses for a result, the less likely it is he will obtain it. Not taking myself too seriously helped me to look at life as a game, and at business as a sort of poker game within the bigger game of life. I pictured the earth as a giant poker table upon which the game of business is played, with only a fixed number of chips on the table. Each player gets to participate for an unknown period of time, and the name of the game is to see how many chips he can pile onto his stack. (I should point out that years later, when I became a student of Austrian economics, I came to understand that, technically speaking, the number of “chips” is not at all fixed; quite the con-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 24

24 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

trary, in fact. Business is not a zero-sum game, because more wealth is constantly being created. The stories in this book, how- ever, relate to specific real estate deals, and rest assured that every real estate closing is a zero-sum game. That’s because the buyer is only willing to come up with “X” amount of money, the seller insists on receiving “Y” amount of money, and if it turns out that “Y” just happens to equal “X”—which is usually the case—the real estate agent ends up with “Z” [as in zero] amount of money.) The chips themselves, of course, are of no particular use to anyone. In fact, financial gluttons have found, to their dismay, that either bathing in money or eating it are unsanitary habits that can cause one to become quite ill. However, chips do serve as a means to an end. The rules of the bigger game of life provide for the exchange of Jungle chips for material items that can help to enhance one’s comfort and pleasure. You might be inclined to ask, “If life is nothing more than a game, why play so hard to win?” To which I would answer, Why not try to win—and, as a bonus, have some fun along the way? Seems like common sense to me. So I decided to go for all I could get, as quickly as I could get it, while I was still vital enough to play the game. Recognizing that both life and business are games also made it easier for me not to take myself too seriously, which in turn made it that much easier to succeed. After all, if life is just a game, why be afraid to take chances? The reality is that there’s no way that you’re going to get out of the game alive anyway, so what’s the point of playing a conservative hand? In the next chapter, I relate some tales of woe that I experi- enced prior to grasping the significance of the Ice Ball Theory, and explain how these agonizing experiences helped me to further formulate my philosophy. As a result, I developed techniques not only to dramatically increase my earnings, but, more important, to make certain that I actually received what I earned. And, of course, had it not been for my early understanding of

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 25

Replacing the Myths 25

the Theory of Sustenance of a Positive Attitude through the As- sumption of a Negative Result, I would never have been able to survive the seemingly endless number of heartaches, humilia- tions, and frustrations that I endured during those early years of trial by fire.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 26

Chapter 3

Passing My Entrance Exam at Screw U.

hen I entered the real estate business, I was both igno- Wrant and naïve, with absolutely no idea of the devas- tating realities that awaited me. Little did I know that I would be able to survive only because of two theories I had developed years earlier. Had it not been for those theories, I probably would not have had the courage to become a real estate agent, because the discouraging remarks that were gleefully di- rected at me by numerous real estate brokers and salesmen would surely have crushed my spirit. It seemed that whenever I talked to people in the business about what was involved in obtaining a real estate license, they would go to great lengths to tell me how tough their profession was, how it was almost impossible for a newcomer to get started, 26 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 27

Passing My Entrance Exam at Screw U. 27

how exceptional a person had to be to succeed as a real estate agent, and, in summation, why it would be a mistake for me to enter their field. Years earlier, this kind of talk would have totally intimi- dated me, and I undoubtedly would have become convinced that I would be wasting my time to even make the effort. Fortunately, however, I had paid a lot of dues long before I decided to go into the real estate business, so I was able to ignore most of the nega- tive grenades tossed at me. I had long before concluded that all members of the Discouragement Fraternity had two things in common: (1) Because they were insecure, they feared competi- tion, and (2) they were ferocious about protecting their turf. The two theories that helped me to survive my entrance exam (i.e., hazing by the Discouragement Fraternity) at Screw U. (my early years in the real estate business) are the focus of this chapter. The first is the Tortoise and Hare Theory, which states: The outcome of most situations in life are determined over the long term. The guy who gets off to a fast start merely wins a battle; the individual who’s ahead at the end of the race wins the war. Battles are for ego-trippers; wars are for money-grippers. The Tortoise is the unglamorous plodder who always seems to find a way to come out ahead, though he has a habit of getting bruised and battered along the way. He isn’t flashy or impressive; his strengths are consistency, perseverance, and resiliency. The Tortoise is the quintessential antihero. Ben Braddock (played by Dustin Hoffman), the shy, stuttering boyfriend in The Graduate, was a classic antihero. He lost every battle, but some- how managed to win the war (the spoils of which were none other than Katharine Ross). Colombo, the fumbling, stumbling detec- tive played by Peter Falk in the old TV series of the same name, was slow when it came to figuring things out, but in the end he always got his man. And how about Rocky Balboa (Sylvester Stal- lone) in the Rocky series? While still in my teens, I became conscious of the fact that I

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 28

28 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

was a very slow starter at most things, yet almost always seemed to find a way to finish strong. I finally concluded that it was my perfectionism that was at the heart of my slow-start habit. I had an inherent urge to have all the ground rules defined, study the lay of the land, prepare a game plan, and organize all the details before moving forward. I tried to (and still do) live by the words of Abraham Lincoln: “If I had eight hours to chop down a tree, I’d spend six sharpening my axe.” As a result of my methodical approach to projects, I began, in a tongue-in-cheek manner, to compare myself to the fabled tor- toise in the tortoise-and-hare tale. I learned, over a period of time, that it was not so important to be the life of the party or the cen- ter of attention in a crowd. The important thing was what hap- pened after the party was over. The big points are scored when you go one-on-one with someone behind closed doors. Glibness in a crowd more often than not is just part of the “all show, no dough” syndrome. So, though I realized that I was not particularly impressive on first meeting—especially in situa- tions where three or more people were involved—I found that I could be very effective by doggedly following up with one-on-one meetings at a later time. I can’t deny that it would be nice to have the kind of person- ality that would dazzle people on first encounter, and I wouldn’t mind being a little faster out of the starting gate, either. The reality, however, is that I don’t have these qualities, and even back in my teen-dumb days I recognized my shortcomings in these areas. And that in turn caused me to focus on playing I had been dealt to the best of my ability. Having christened myself “The Tortoise,” my motto be- came: If you slow down enough to look over your right shoulder, I’ll pass you on the left; if you slow down enough to look over your left shoulder, I’ll pass you on the right; and if you try to stop me from passing you on either side, I’ll maneuver between your legs, if that’s what it takes. That heavy breathing you hear be- hind you is me—steadily closing in on you.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 29

Passing My Entrance Exam at Screw U. 29

Or, in more direct terms: Quickly getting out of the starting blocks may get people’s attention, but all that counts is where you are when the race is over. In other words, a tortoise focuses on long-term results. If a stuttering shrimp like Dustin Hoffman could win Katharine Ross, who knows what treasures might lie ahead for a relent- less, resourceful reptile? So, after years of playing the role of The Tortoise—of finding a way to win so many seemingly lost races— I was not going to allow myself to be intimidated by the Discour- agement Fraternity when I entered the real estate business. The second theory that played a major role in protecting me from the Discouragement Fraternity when I first entered Screw U. was the Organic Chemistry Theory, which states: Don’t allow yourself to be intimidated by know-it-alls who thrive on bestowing their knowledge on insecure people. Mentally close your ears and put blinders on your eyes, and move relentlessly forward with the knowledge that what someone else knows is not relevant. In the final analysis, what is relevant to your suc- cess is what you know and what you do. This theory was derived from an experience I had at age 20 that forever changed my life. When I was in college, I took a cur- riculum that was required for application to––of all things––dental school. One of the required courses was organic chemistry, which also was one of the most dreaded of all undergraduate subjects. The course was so difficult that it had a 50 percent student failure rate. After attending the first lecture, I became convinced that I, too, was destined to join the legions of students who had flunked organic chemistry. I had absolutely no idea what the instructor was talking about. For all I knew, a molecule was a spare part in an automobile engine. The worst, however, was yet to come. On the second day, we had our first laboratory session, and it was like a psychedelic nightmare for me. All I could see was one big blur of test tubes, acid bottles, and white aprons. I considered it to be a giant step forward when I finally located my laboratory

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 30

30 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

desk. As I sat on my stool, displaying what would years later come to be known as the Dan Quayle look, I kept thinking that a savior-instructor would appear at the front of the laboratory at any moment and explain what we should be doing. No such luck. What was especially disconcerting to me was that all the other students in the lab appeared to know exactly what they were do- ing. Could this really be the road leading to Katharine Ross? Then, all at once, I saw him—tall, slender, and sporting a blond crew cut and look of self-assurance that suggested both boredom (with how easy it all was) and disdain (for thick-headed reptiles like me). As big as life, there he was—standing right at the end of my laboratory row—the guy who was to be the focal point of one of the most important revelations of my life, a reve- lation that I would ultimately transform into a theory to help me snatch victory from the jaws of defeat time and again long after my graduation from Screw U. Who was this tall, light stranger? None other than—Sound the trumpets!—a Court Holder. (In the coming years, I would find that Court Holders come in all shapes, sizes, and colors; i.e., tall and blond are by no means required physical characteristics of this fascinating species.) What qualifies an individual to be a Court Holder? It’s really quite simple: A Court Holder is a person who makes a career out of holding court. He was the fellow at the last cocktail party you attended—the one standing poised and charming, one elbow on the mantle, a drink in his hand, and a group of information- starved puppies flocking around him in a semicircle—explaining how utterly simple it all is. Most important, a Court Holder is a master intimidator. A truly professional Court Holder is not particular about where he holds court, either. He can do it just as effectively whether he’s in a clubhouse locker room, at the office, or, by golly, in a chemistry lab. The only requirement for calling his court into session is that there be two or more information- starved subjects willing to listen to him pontificate. Of course,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 31

Passing My Entrance Exam at Screw U. 31

the more subjects the Court Holder has in his court, the better he likes it. And the more wide-eyed they are with awe, the more in- spired he is to sprinkle smatterings of his seemingly infinite knowledge around the court. My eyes nearly bulged out of my head as I watched the Court Holder flipping test tubes around like a professional juggler, non- chalantly lighting his Bunsen burner backhanded, and leafing through his laboratory workbook so quickly that I was certain he would finish the entire course in less than two days. A crowd was quickly gathering around him. Hope shot into my heart as I bounded down the aisle toward this dazzling para- gon of knowledge. Surely there must be a crumb or two of wis- dom he could spare a hopelessly lost reptile like me. Surely he would not turn me away without his tip of the day. I was in luck. As the Court Holder breezed through the labo- ratory experiments for that particular day, he graciously and si- multaneously held court for a dozen or so puppies and one tortoise. He even took the trouble to answer a couple of my intel- lectually loaded questions, such as, “Er, where do I obtain a key to my locker?” and “Who do I see about getting a laboratory apron?” without so much as looking up from his test tubes. I wasn’t even granted a look of disdain like most of the other subjects in his court. I guess I was such a hopeless pudding head that I was considered to be an untouchable in organic-chemistry circles. Nonetheless, for me it was true love. Fantasies of some day getting an autographed picture of this modern-day Einstein flooded my mind. This pattern repeated itself for several weeks, though I even- tually did succeed in getting both a laboratory apron and a key to my locker. However, I accepted the fact that I would never be anything but a lowly serf in the Court Holder’s organic-chemistry kingdom. That being the case, I decided to play the hand I had been dealt as best I could. I trudged ahead, tortoise style, studying my textbook hour upon hour each night. Yet, no matter how much I studied, I never seemed to be quite up on what was being

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 32

“Oh, Great Blond One, where might I obtain a key to my laboratory locker?”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 33

Passing My Entrance Exam at Screw U. 33

discussed in class, and I continued to be completely lost in labo- ratory. Regardless of how much time and effort I put into it, it was obvious to me that I would always be an untouchable in the eyes of his majesty, the Court Holder. Then, one day, a funny thing happened on the way to court: We had an examination. As the instructor passed out the test, you could hear moans throughout the room as the students began to glance at the complex questions. Much to my surprise, how- ever, whatever had been going on in laboratory during the preced- ing weeks evidently had been explained in the textbook (which I had virtually memorized), because the material on the test seemed pretty familiar to me. When the exam was over, students came stumbling out of the classroom looking shell-shocked and talking in a thoroughly defeated manner. I was too embarrassed even to mention it, but, frankly, the questions had not seemed that difficult to me. Surely, I reasoned, I must have completely misunderstood the subject matter during my long and gut-wrenching study sessions. Why else would the test not have seemed very difficult? When it came time for the test papers to be handed back to us about a week later, fear filled the auditorium-size classroom. The instructor announced the “curve” (i.e., grading scale based on averages) for the test as follows:

48 & up A (excellent) 40–47 B (good) 26–39 C (average) 20–25 D (poor) 19 & under F (give up and get a Burger King application)

The instructor told the class that the scores had ranged from zero to 105. (There had been two bonus questions, so it was theo- retically possible to score 108 on the test.) He went on to say that, out of a class of approximately 300 students, the next highest grade (after the score of 105) was 58. The class gasped in unison. It

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 34

34 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

was inconceivable that the second highest score in a class of 300 students was 47 points lower than the top grade. The instructor said that it was only appropriate to hand out the paper with the near-perfect score of 105 first, and that he would then call the rest of the students in alphabetical order to come forward and get their results. The students sitting around the Court Holder began patting him on the back and elbowing him (“You sonofagun, you . . .”), but he looked so bored by the certainty of it all that I thought he was going to fall asleep. P.S. He should have. Impossible as it seemed, the Court Holder didn’t get the 105. In fact, he didn’t even get the 58. What this master intimidator did get was a solid 33 that placed him smack in the middle of the class. Inconceivable as it may have been, the reality was that the Court Holder was only average. He was, in fact, the Organic Emperor who had no clothes. Of course, you’ve already guessed the punch line. You can imagine how embarrassed I was as I walked to the front of the room to pick up my 105 test score. Though I looked straight ahead during the remainder of the day’s session, I could feel 300 pairs of eyes staring at me. Telepathically, I could hear the Court Holder’s groupies wondering, “Who is this green, scaly character, anyway? I’ve never even noticed him in here before.” When the bell rang, I hustled out the door, feeling too self- conscious to talk to anyone. I immediately resigned from the court and breezed through the remainder of the course with a high “A.” The only thing that put a damper on the remainder of the year for me was the uneasy feeling that the Court Holder was continually staring at me out of the corner of his eye during labo- ratory sessions. Egad, I loved his crew cut. Why in the heck did my hair have to be so fine that I couldn’t get it to stand up straight even with gum tar? Ah, well, we can’t have it all, can we? Blessed Court Holder, wherever you may now be, I want you to know that I shall forever be indebted to you. Since my en- counter with you in organic chemistry lab, I’ve met many mem- bers of your species, and in each case, because of my experience

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 35

Passing My Entrance Exam at Screw U. 35

with you, I was able to quickly identify them as Court Holders. Further, I’ve had the self-confidence to ignore their intimidating ways and go for life’s big payoffs without a shred of embarrass- ment. Yes, it was that Hall-of-Fame Court Holder in organic chemistry who provided the first step toward my understand- ing that the refusal to be intimidated was a crucial element in winning. In summation, if someone feels the psychological need to hold court, that’s his business; your job is to mind your busi- ness. Don’t allow yourself to be intimidated by someone else’s knowledge—or apparent knowledge. What another person knows or doesn’t know will not affect your success one way or another, so from your standpoint it’s an irrelevancy. Armed with the Tortoise and Hare Theory and Organic Chem- istry Theory, I felt qualified and ready to enter that most revered of all institutions of higher learning, Screw U. These theories gave me the strength to withstand the negative barrages of intimi- dation directed at me by the Discouragement Fraternity, and the courage to forge ahead into the real estate business.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 36

Chapter 4

My Three Unforgettable Professors at Screw U.

refer to my first three years in the real estate business as my Iundergraduate days at Screw U. because it was during this time that I was forced, through firsthand experience, to come to grips with the realities of the Businessworld Jungle. In curricu- lum terms, you might say that my major was Reality and my mi- nor was Real Estate. Without question, the most important reality I discovered during those early years was that there are basically only three types of people in the business world. (There is actually a fourth type—the individual who stands to benefit directly as a result of your financial success; i.e., the more you make, the more he makes. However, the latter type, in its pure form, is a rare excep-

36 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 37

My Three Unforgettable Professors at Screw U. 37

tion, so it need not be addressed in this book. The emphasis here is on the majority of individuals who do not stand to benefit from your success.) Let’s assume, for the moment, that you’re a real estate agent, and that you represent the owner of a property. It’s nice to say that the owner will benefit by your success in selling his prop- erty, but, as discussed earlier, success is a relative word. Granted, he will benefit to the extent he receives money from the buyer, but he will not benefit by your success in collecting a real estate commission. Like it or not, it’s a zero-sum game, so collecting your commission should be your main criterion for success; sell- ing the owner’s property (which is his chief criterion for success) is but a means to the end you seek. The painful reality is that the less the real estate agent makes, the better it is for the seller (and, theoretically, the buyer, since the buyer is the one who comes up with the money that ul- timately pays the real estate commission). This is why buyers and sellers understand all too well the Mideast proverb that “the enemy of my enemy is my friend.” And if you have a commission or fee owing to you—regardless of the business you’re in—you are the enemy of both principals! If you don’t believe it, save yourself a life of grief and become a California beach bum. There’s an old business adage that “the only way a deal works out is if everybody benefits from the transaction,” and, in theory, I suppose it’s true. But in real life, this philosophy doesn’t seem to include deal “pests” who are owed fees and/or commis- sions for their work. In the real estate business, for example, the empirical evidence suggests that the word everybody refers only to the buyer and seller. Regardless of the type of business you’re in, the above exam- ple should help you understand why certain people may have been less than fair with you in past dealings. It may have been in their best interest to see you succeed, but their definition of suc- cess may not have included having to pay you what you earned.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 38

38 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

It’s nice to get patted on the back and told what a dandy job you did, but that shouldn’t be your definition of success. What you want is cash, not kudos. What I’m talking about here is the Three Type Theory, which states: There are only three types of people in the business world (with the one exception noted above), as follows:

Type Number One, who lets you know from the outset— either through his words, his actions, or both—that he’s out to get your chips. He then follows through by attempting to do just that. Type Number Two, who goes to great lengths to assure you that he would never dream of pilfering your chips, often trying to throw you off guard by assuring you that he really wants to see you “get everything that’s coming to you.” Then, like Type Num- ber One—and without hesitation—he goes about trying to grab your chips anyway. Type Number Three, who, like Type Number Two, assures you that he’s not interested in your chips. Unlike Type Number Two, however, he sincerely means what he says. But that’s where the difference ends. Due to any one of a number of reasons— ranging from his own bungling to his amoral standards for ratio- nalizing what’s right and wrong—he, like Types Number One and Two, still ends up trying to grab your chips. Which means that his supposed good intentions are really irrelevant to the final outcome. In summation, no matter how someone posits himself, you would be wise to assume that he will, in the final analysis, at- tempt to grab your chips.

So, even though someone may say that he wants to see you “get what’s coming to you,” that doesn’t mean that you have to believe it. Instead, you would be wise to count on human nature guiding the other person’s actions when the money’s on the table,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 39

My Three Unforgettable Professors at Screw U. 39

and in turn rely on your own survival instincts to guard against an attempt to heist your chips. Let me emphasize that if I could recreate the world so the above realities did not exist, I most definitely would. Alas, how- ever, humility forces me to admit that I cannot alter human nature one iota. I am but a messenger, and, as such, am merely passing along to you what my firsthand experience at Screw U. taught me. Like it or not—and most people don’t—the Three Type Theory is simply a reality of Planet Earth. In the next three chapters, I discuss (in the order in which they came into my life) three of my most exemplary professors during my undergraduate days at Screw U. These noble gentle- men will forever serve as my stereotypes for the three kinds of creatures who inhabit the Businessworld Jungle. They were high- level financial proctologists who did a marvelous job of teaching me how to identify other members of their species. The lessons I learned from them helped to prepare me for their ruthless rela- tives who were lying in wait for me in the Jungle, and I am forever in their debt for sharing their wisdom with me.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 40

Chapter 5

Type Number Three Is Sincerely Sorry That He Grabbed Your Chips, but the Result Is Just the Same As If He Were Glad

hat makes a Type Number Three so deadly is that Whe’s neither menacing like a Type Number One nor diabolical like a Type Number Two. On the contrary, he has good intentions. He sincerely wants you to get a fair shake, but, due to some “unforeseen” reason(s), he somehow always seems to find himself in a position where he has “no choice” but to grab your chips. The fact that he is genuinely sorry for having to hurt you makes it difficult for you to think of him in a negative light. After all, the devil made him do it. In essence, what a Type Number Three is really saying to you when he separates you from your chips is: “I really didn’t mean to cut off your fingers, but I had no choice when you reached for your chips.” 40 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 41

Type Number Three Is Sincerely Sorry 41

My maiden contact with a Type Number Three came on my very first day at Screw U. I knew virtually nothing about real es- tate, let alone the warped psyches of buyers and sellers. Yet, as fate would have it, the first deal I worked on—a $5 million apart- ment development in Cincinnati—was quite large for a new- comer to the business. I had heard rumors that the owners of the Cincinnati project, which was still partly under construction, were in serious finan- cial trouble, so I decided to try a unique approach. I contacted one of the partners and, instead of inquiring about the possibility of listing his property for sale, asked him for a job. The way I phrased it was that I would like to “work on solving the financial problems (his) apartment development was experiencing.” He told me that he couldn’t afford to hire anyone, and, even if he could, he wouldn’t hire me, because I had no previous real estate experience. I quickly assured him that I could make up in energy, enthu- siasm, and persistence what I lacked in knowledge and experi- ence, but he continued to resist. Being the relentless tortoise I was, I finally offered to work for him on a “prove it or else” basis. I told him that I would work without a guaranteed salary, and would even pay my own expenses, but if I solved the financial problems of his apartment development, I wanted to be “paid handsomely in return.” Slave labor is always an appealing carrot to dangle in front of penny-pinching real estate developers, so, based on my everything-to-gain-and-nothing-to-lose proposition, he finally relented and allowed me to work on the project. On the strength of this shaky and vague verbal understanding, my real estate career was thus launched. What I was counting on was the Law of Risk and Reward: The less the risk, the lower the potential reward; the greater the risk, the higher the potential reward. In a perfect world, a sales- man would have no guarantees, but would also have no limit on what he could earn. If my first professor at Screw U. had agreed to put me on his payroll, it undoubtedly would have been at the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 42

42 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

legal minimum wage. As a result, I would have missed out on the opportunity not only to gain a great deal of knowledge about how the Businessworld Jungle works, but to earn some serious money right out of the starting gate. In fact, in retrospect—considering how valuable my experience with my professor turned out to be—I would have to say that, on a value-for-value basis, I proba- bly should have paid him for all the knowledge I acquired during the time I worked on his project. The Cincinnati deal allowed me to learn early on that most of the cash-shortage problems real estate developers experience are a result of their undertaking projects without having much, if any, of their own cash invested in them. Nirvana for a real estate developer is to find a way to “finance out,” i.e., to not put any of his own money into a project. To accomplish this, most builders are masters at using mirrors, so to speak, to finesse their way from one project to another. An important talent in this regard is the art of ducking subcontractors who have the audacity to demand payment for their services, then ultimately paying off accrued construction debts through a pipe dream known as cash flow. (In most cases, the illusion of a positive cash flow is based on unrealistically low operating expenses and replacement costs. Down the road, of course, the Delusion Fiddler must be paid, and all too often payment is in the form of a currency known as bankruptcy.) My Type Number Three professor was pretty much of a silent partner in the Cincinnati project, and it was clear from the outset that he and the working partner (“Victor ”) were not on good terms (par for the course when financial problems set in). Victor lived in Cincinnati, and was on the building site every day overseeing construction. My Type Number Three professor’s main contribution to the deal was that he had done the initial spade work in the planning and financing stages. After a couple of weeks, I decided it was time to go to Cincinnati and speak directly with Victor, since I figured he

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 43

Type Number Three Is Sincerely Sorry 43

would have a more up-to-date reading of the situation. Little did I know that it would turn out to be my Businessworld Jungle bap- tism. On several occasions, I set up appointments with Victor, traveled all the way to Cincinnati, then sat in his waiting room for as long as eight hours. Being the inexperienced twit that I was, I did not understand that Victor was a master intimidator, so I would just sit in his reception room and dutifully suck my thumb, play with my yo-yo, and read old issues of Builder’s Indigestion 20 or 30 times. One day in particular stands out in my mind. I had a firm ap- pointment with Victor at 9:00 a.m., and, just to be on the safe side, I showed up at 8:45 a.m. Not only did Victor not acknowl- edge my presence all morning, but around noon he bolted out of his office with two other men and hurried right past me, without even a nod, on his way to lunch. Meekly, I called out to him and asked when he would be ready to meet with me. Without break- ing stride, and barely looking back over his shoulder, he mum- bled something that sounded like, “Back in a little while.” Why would I endure such humiliating treatment? Stupidity, to be sure. But, in fairness to reptiles throughout the world, it was the first real estate deal I had ever worked on. In addition, I was penniless (the world’s most foolproof humbler), had no other deals in the hopper, and had no idea how to go about finding other deals. So, at this early stage of my undergraduate studies at Screw U., it’s not difficult to recall why, from my perspective, every deal was life or death. So much so that I felt I couldn’t even take a chance on going out and grabbing a sandwich for lunch. After all, I didn’t know when Victor might return to his office, and, after waiting all morning, I didn’t want to take any chances on missing him when he returned. When Victor finally showed up two hours later, I was a very hungry, very tired tortoise, so tired that I almost didn’t look up in time to see him before he reached his office door. This time I

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 44

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 45

Type Number Three Is Sincerely Sorry 45

called out in a much weaker, much more defeated voice, and this time he totally ignored me. Unbeknownst to me at the time, what I was experiencing were the horrors a tortoise encoun- ters when dealing from an inferior posture. As his office door slammed shut, the thought of giving up entered my mind. Fortu- nately, however, the tortoise within me persisted, and I stub- bornly sat in Victor’s reception room until 5:00 p.m. I finally got to talk with him only because, in desperation, I literally lunged in his path as he was leaving his office for the day. After a series of punishing experiences like this, I finally learned that Victor had talked a mortgage banker into increasing the construction loan on his project and immediately advancing some additional funds, provided certain conditions were met. The most important of these conditions was that he was required to buy out my Type Number Three professor’s interest in the de- velopment. I asked Victor how much he was willing to pay his partner, and, after thinking about it for a few minutes, he came up with a price, whereupon I told him that I would discuss his offer with my professor. I then met with my professor and explained the situation, but packaged it a bit differently. The reason I did this was because not only was my agreement with my professor not in writing, even our verbal understanding did not spell out the precise amount of my fee. In fact, we had not even specified exactly what it was that I was supposed to accomplish in order to be entitled to my unspecified fee. All we had was a fuzzy understanding that I was supposed to be “paid handsomely” if I “solved the financial problems in Cincinnati.” This is about as vague as an under- standing can get—even in the Jungle. Closing a deal of one kind or another was beginning to look like a real possibility, and it was becoming obvious to me that I needed to get more specific with my professor. I reasoned that if I told him that Victor Vermin was prepared to pay the price that he (i.e., Victor) had just quoted me, and if that price was acceptable to my professor, neither of them would need me to make a

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 46

46 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

deal. (In tortoise language, “Duhhh!”) At a minimum, once my professor knew what Victor’s offer was, he would be in a position to dictate to me what my reward should be. I therefore told my professor only that I had been “kicking around some ideas with Victor,” and, though I thought it would be a hard sell, there was a chance I might be able to get him to buy my professor’s share of the project at a price that would get him (i.e., my professor) off the hook for most of the debts he had in- curred in connection with the Cincinnati deal. Then, I went a step further, because I was concerned that the price Victor had quoted me was so low that it might only succeed in angering my professor. Based on what he had told me about the extent of his financial problems, I was pretty certain that the sug- gested buy-out price would not completely bail him out of his financial difficulties. So I quoted him an even lower price than the one Victor had suggested, emphasizing that this was probably the best I could hope to do. It was the age-old game of “I go low, you go high, then we compromise in the middle.” (This simple strategy works just as well today as it did for merchants and traders in ancient China, Mesopotamia, and Greece. Why? Because human nature never changes. Only a fool—or an intelligent but naïve person—gives his best offer right off the bat.) Even though I had only recently enrolled at Screw U., I instinctively knew that my professor would want to negotiate the price upward no matter what the initial fig- ure was that I quoted him. That being the case, my objective was to negotiate up to Victor’s offering price rather than have to nego- tiate upward from that price. Never forget: Human beings are genetically programmed to always want more. As I suspected would be the case, my professor’s initial reaction was that the price I had suggested was absolutely unac- ceptable. However, after several days of discussions and many persistent and persuasive tortoise remarks later, I was able to get my professor to see that, in the long run, it would be better for him if I could “talk Victor into” buying him out at a price roughly

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 47

Type Number Three Is Sincerely Sorry 47

equal to the one that (unbeknownst to my professor) Victor had already said he would be willing to pay. I further convinced my professor that the project was des- tined to get into ever more financial trouble (which turned out to be a correct assessment on my part), and that he would be much better off to bail out now, get off the hook for any personal lia- bility he had incurred, and still manage to come up with enough cash to pay off at least some of his other debts. In retrospect, con- sidering all these factors, I probably did him a greater service than any other buyer or seller for whom I subsequently worked. I should point out that in order to arrive at the price I quoted my professor, I subtracted $6,500 from the price Victor had told me he would be willing to pay. The $6,500 cushion represented the fee I arbitrarily decided would be a reasonable payment for my services for “solving the financial problems in Cincinnati.” Feigning an afterthought, I then casually told my professor that I would try very hard to increase the price that he had tentatively agreed to (i.e., the amount that was $6,500 lower than Victor’s of- fering price) by “five or ten thousand dollars” so I could “get a lit- tle something out of the deal, too.” My professor nodded his head indifferently. After all, anything I got “over and above” what he was supposed to receive was of no interest to him, right? Not exactly. The reality was that it was purely academic, as is always the case with fees and commissions, regardless of the kind of business you’re in. It was, in fact, a simple matter of “psy- chological packaging.” All I did was create the illusion that what- ever fee I received would be over and above what my professor was willing to accept. The reality was that the less I received as a fee, the more money my professor would pocket. Anyone who as- pires to success in any field of endeavor would do well to become adept at psychological packaging, or else be prepared to be over- whelmed by a nasty little human trait called greed. This is espe- cially true when dealing with supposedly “good guys” who seem genuinely sincere about wanting to see you get paid. Good inten- tions aside, never bet against greed!

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 48

48 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

I now sensed that it was time to move in for the kill. I meek- ly asked my professor if he would mind signing “a simple little document” saying that the net price we had discussed was agree- able to him. I assured him that the only reason for wanting some- thing in writing was to “have something in my hand” when I tried to “persuade” Victor to accept my professor’s “offer” (which, I again emphasize, was $6,500 lower than the amount Victor had already agreed to pay). You’re probably wondering why I was dumb enough to show Victor a document that stated that my professor would take less than Victor had offered. Didn’t I realize that Victor would simply lower his offer to match the figure my professor had agreed to? Of course I realized it! The answer is that I didn’t show him the document. Show Victor Vermin the agreement that spelled out my commission? Are you kidding? Victor ate little kids for break- fast and didn’t bother to spit out the bones. He rooted for the Atlantic Ocean in Titanic. Charles Manson was his idol. Victor was a classic, avaricious, mean-spirited real estate developer who took great delight in nickel and diming his adversaries to death— and anyone to whom he owed money was an adversary. My real purpose for having my professor sign the “letter of understanding” was not just to “have something in my hand” when I went to Cincinnati, but to have something in writing re- garding my fee. Once my professor had signed on the dotted line, I casually told him that I would probably use $6,500 as a “work- ing number” for my fee, tack it on to the figure he and I had dis- cussed, then put the total figure into the document as the price he had agreed to accept from Victor. It was on-the-job training in psychology and phraseology. When you deal with sick minds, never waste time trying to be- come a healer. The most humane act you can perform for such a person is to state things in such a way that it will make him feel better about how things work out—especially if it involves your getting paid. You can cause him great stress if you allow him to believe that he might actually be paying you what he owes you.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 49

Type Number Three Is Sincerely Sorry 49

To make it appear almost as an afterthought, I purposely put the sentence about my $6,500 fee near the bottom of the docu- ment. In later years, I realized that my instincts, even at that early stage of my undergraduate days at Screw U., had been very good, because again and again I was to find that “afterthought” was a pretty accurate description of how most sellers view a real estate agent’s commission. (Never state, in an agreement, what you want out of the deal before stating what the other party is go- ing to get, because the other guy doesn’t give a hoot about what you want. All he’s interested in is what’s in it for him. This is es- pecially true of people who insist that “in order for a deal to work out, everyone has to be satisfied.” Forget such babble; it’s a fairy tale that will only cause you to drop your guard and lose some fin- gers in the process.) Subsequent to my professor’s signing the document, I again went back to Victor and emphasized what a hard sell it had been for me to get his partner to agree to his buy-out figure, but that I had finally succeeded. Just as I had packaged my presentation of the deal in such a way that my professor would think of my fee as “over and above” what he was getting out of the deal, I also had to be certain that Victor didn’t get any cute ideas about being able to save $6,500 by merely changing his original buy-out price to one that was equal to the net figure that my professor had agreed to accept. As far as Victor knew, the original price he had discussed with me (again, an amount equal to the price my professor had agreed to plus my $6,500 fee) was the one that my professor was willing to accept. I told Victor that my professor was very uneasy about the deal, and that I could not guarantee that he wouldn’t change his mind if we didn’t proceed promptly. This got his attention. Feel- ing that it might be his only opportunity to get his partner out of the deal at a price he considered to be a bargain, Victor did every- thing he could to help bring about a quick closing. Of course, with my professor I played it 180 degrees opposite, emphasizing how difficult it had been for me to get Victor to

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 50

50 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

agree to “his” figure (the one that included my $6,500 fee). Just as I had done with Victor, I emphasized that I didn’t know how long I could keep Victor committed to the deal, and urged him to do everything possible to help get it closed. As closings go, this was as good as it gets, because all three parties involved—the buyer, the seller, and the real estate agent— were working hard to accomplish the same objective. As we pro- gressed toward a closing, I observed a phenomenon that I was later to discover occurs prior to most real estate closings. My pro- fessor “sharpened his pencil” (his words) and continued to find one cost after another that he either had not previously consid- ered or hadn’t known about. How convenient. (In later years, this kind of talk got so old that I had to restrain myself from yawning.) My professor was a classic Type Number Three. Virtually everyone who had ever dealt with him felt that he was a nice guy and a basically honest person, but that he had experienced a string of bad luck that had caused him to “unintentionally” dam- age a lot of people along the way. The closer we got to the closing, the more my professor sharpened his pencil. Being a Type Number Three, he was very nice about it and never came right out and said that he did not in- tend to pay my fee. He just mumbled a lot of negatives, and the more figuring he did, the more he mumbled—and the more con- cerned I became. In fact, my concern became so great that I dared to ask my- self a question that only an inexperienced reptile like myself would dare to ask: “If the buyer and seller in a real estate deal are represented by attorneys at a closing, why shouldn’t the real es- tate agent also be represented by an attorney?” Sort of like the first ape—in the Planet of the Apes movie—to have the audacity to say, “No!” to a human being’s command. After all, didn’t I have a vested interest in the deal, too? Nonetheless, every time the question crossed my mind, I thought to myself that if I showed up at the closing with an attorney, my professor would take it as an insult to his integrity and probably

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 51

Type Number Three Is Sincerely Sorry 51

use it as an excuse not to pay me anything at all. In a sense, my own thoughts were intimidating me. Finally, the big day arrived—my first real estate closing. I talked to my professor just a couple hours before the closing was scheduled to take place, and in typical Type Number Three fash- ion he expressed sincere concern for my position. He said he felt terrible about it, but, after adding up all the figures, there was just no way he could spare even $100 out of the proceeds of the clos- ing, let alone $6,500. I found his remark to be quite fascinating. I wondered how he could talk in terms of not being able to “spare” when it wasn’t even his money he was talking about. Those were my chips he was referring to; they weren’t his to spare! In addition, I thought to myself that whether or not my professor “felt terrible about it” was irrelevant. “Forget the niceties,” I thought to myself, “and just fork over my chips.” My professor then assured me that in the “not too distant fu- ture” he would “see to it” that I would get “every dime that was coming to (me).” Sure, prof, no problem. He said he was working on a number of deals (all pie-in-the-sky, I might add), and that some were certain to close soon, at which time he would have plenty of cash with which to pay me. Sure, prof. In other words, he was telling me, “I’m sticking it to you now, but trust me not to do it to you down the road.” I figured the next thing he would do is pull out a picture of Ebbets Field and say, “By the way, I have a nice property in New York that you might be interested in selling.” Luckily for me, I was stone broke. If I had been in a financial position to wait a few months, or even a few weeks, I probably would have backed off, given that I was still at a very easy-to- intimidate stage of my development. But I was so pushed to the wall that I could not wait even one more day, let alone weeks or months. I didn’t say anything menacing to my professor, because I didn’t want to put him on guard. Instead, in response to the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 52

52 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

“concern” he expressed about me, I just mumbled that I would see him at the closing and that “perhaps there might be a way to work something out.” He gave me a “Sure, no problem” nod that I later realized was used in the Jungle as a euphemism for “Yeh, sure, anything you say; just take a hike.” I then made a bold decision. I scurried over to the office of an attorney friend of mine, showed him the document my professor had signed, described the conversation I had just had with him, and explained that the closing was about to take place. The attor- ney and I then went over to my professor’s office and found that all the parties involved were in the process of preparing for the closing. Whereupon my attorney sat down with the other two law- yers, and the three of them went through the mechanics of final- izing the deal. Although I didn’t understand the principle at the time, what I had going for me at that closing was the unwritten, universally accepted understanding among all attorneys that I subsequently dubbed the Universal Attorney-to-Attorney Re- spect Rule. It’s kind of analogous to “honor among thieves.” In street parlance, the unwritten rule among lawyers is: You can rape and pillage civilians, but don’t mess with the good fellas in the club. The simplest way to illustrate this law is to remind you of the last time you were a party to a lawsuit, and how the attor- neys for both sides left the courtroom arm-in-arm while discussing their upcoming Sunday golf game. Doesn’t it warm the cockles of your heart to see the guy to whom you’re paying $200 an hour shmoozing with the attorney who is trying to destroy you? While the lawyers proceeded with the closing, I chatted with my professor and Victor Vermin about the weather, extraterres- trial life, and the merits of Metamucil. Sure, it was embarrassing, but I sucked it up inside and tried to convey a matter-of-fact atti- tude. I just kept asking myself, “Why shouldn’t a real estate agent also be represented by an attorney at a closing?” After all, I was too inexperienced to know any better, right? P.S. I got my $6,500 fee—at the closing.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 53

“Did you guys happen to read the National Enquirer article about extraterrestrials preferring Metamucil in the travel-packet size?”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 54

54 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

Finally, in case you’re wondering, I should point out that I have never doubted the propriety of my creative handling of this transaction, because I had thought it out carefully in advance and felt that my actions were justified on at least three counts: First, not only did I not have a written agreement with my professor, I didn’t even have a clear verbal agreement. Our under- standing was vague, at best. All I had done was volunteer to try to “solve the financial problems in Cincinnati,” and, if “successful” (which also was not defined), I was supposed to be “paid hand- somely in return.” In other words, there was no agreement, writ- ten or verbal, that morally obliged me to present my professor with offers to buy out his interest in the property. I was strictly on my own, and my fiduciary responsibility was to myself. Second, as it turned out, everything I did was, in fact, in my professor’s best interest. As I mentioned earlier, after analyzing the figures I became convinced that the project was headed for even more financial difficulties, and my analysis turned out to be accurate. I also was convinced that I would never be able to work out a deal if I presented my professor with Victor Vermin’s real of- fering price. By being a little creative, I did him a great service by helping him to avert what would have been a financial catastro- phe for him later on. The bottom line is that both partners ended up being satisfied with the result, the proof being the fact that they agreed in writing to the final terms of the deal. It may not have been the deal that either of them wanted, but it was the deal that they were both willing to accept at that time and under the circumstances that then existed. Third, and most important from the standpoint of the theme of this book, is that the events at the closing proved that I had more than ample reason to be cautious about how I handled the negotiations. When it got down to the short strokes, my Type Number Three professor’s actions left no doubt in my mind that I would have walked away from the closing with nubs for fingers had I not taken precautions to protect my own interests as well as his.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 55

Type Number Three Is Sincerely Sorry 55

How fortunate I had been. I had learned firsthand about the dead- liness of Type Number Threes without having to experience the sick feeling that comes from having one’s chips pilfered at the eleventh hour. Had my Cincinnati deal not ended on a happy note, it’s very possible that I might not have been able to con- tinue in the real estate business due to my precarious financial situation. In addition to learning how a Type Number Three operates, I received a bonus in this deal in that I got an answer to my naive question, “Why shouldn’t a real estate agent also be represented by an attorney at a closing?” Firsthand experience had emphati- cally given me the answer: “He should!” Regardless of the business you’re in, never allow yourself to be intimidated into believing that you aren’t entitled to the same rights as the so-called principals in a deal. I say so-called, be- cause, from your standpoint, you are a principal. If you have a vested interest in a deal, you have a right to protect that interest, regardless of the size of your stake relative to the other players’ shares. Just don’t expect the other principals to share your view- point. Forewarned is forearmed.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 56

Chapter 6

Type Number One Isn’t Sorry That He Grabbed Your Chips, Because He Warned You Ahead of Time How He Plays the Game

lthough I wasn’t aware of it, I was already familiar with AType Number Ones prior to my entering Screw U. Be- cause he wears a black hat, a Type Number One is quite easy to . He doesn’t hide the fact that he’s out to grab as many chips as possible, and that anyone who attempts to grab any chips for himself is viewed as an adversary. In other words, he doesn’t try to be clever; he lays his cards on the table from the outset. What a Type Number One is saying to you when he squeezes the last dollar from your deal is: “I really meant to cut off your fin- gers, just as I told you I would, and before you reached for your chips you should have remembered my warning.” In this respect, it might be fair to argue that a Type Number One is the most honest of the three types of people in the Busi- 56 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 57

Type Number One Isn’t Sorry 57

nessworld Jungle. Yet, prior to my experiences at Screw U., I thought the word crook was a pretty good description of a Type Number One. It wasn’t until I became more educated that I was able to see that if a Type Number One’s menacing gestures give you reason for concern, the solution is simple: You have the op- tion of not becoming involved with him. On the other hand, if you do decide to become involved in a business transaction with a Type Number One, there should be no doubt in your mind (unless your brain is on a life-support sys- tem) about his intentions. If you end up getting a severe mani- cure, it’s likely that you either refused to acknowledge the reality of with whom you were dealing or you simply weren’t prepared. You only delude yourself if you try to claim that you were drawn into a transaction under the guise that you thought you would be dealing with someone who would be generous with you. Anyone who has spent more than a day at Screw U. knows a Type Num- ber One on sight. My Type Number One professor was an elderly gentleman who had accumulated considerable wealth through his vast knowl- edge of the real estate business, and he proved to be an excellent teacher. When it came to class, he was to the manner born, yet he would not hesitate to cut out your heart if you failed to live up to your side of an agreement. At his age and financial station in life, he didn’t need any more chips, so it was the pure fun—the thrill of crushing desperate real estate developers—that attracted him. Like so many positive experiences in life, coming in contact with my Type Number One professor happened on a lark. After attending Screw U. for several months, I concluded that there was a big demand among real estate developers for secondary fi- nancing. Since most builders were desperate for money to keep their paper empires from collapsing, it seemed to me that this was an area of the real estate business in which it would be easy to find and sign up deals. I happened to run across my professor’s name while looking

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 58

58 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

through a directory of capital sources in an effort to locate second-mortgage lenders. He specialized in making large second- mortgage loans on income-producing properties such as apart- ment developments, shopping centers, and office buildings. My professor turned out to be a stern who often tongue-lashed me for being too trusting. Whenever my inclina- tion was to give a prospective borrower the benefit of the doubt, his position was that there was no such thing as benefit of the doubt in business dealings. His idea of an everyone-wins deal was to tie the other guy’s hands behind his back, bind his feet, close off all avenues of escape, then “negotiate.” It was through my Type Number One professor that I first learned about one of the most important weapons that all wealthy people have at their disposal: staying power.I marveled at how he was prepared to walk away from any deal, because there was no one deal that was that important to him. As a result, he could not be intimidated. The first deal he and I worked on together clearly demon- strated his hard-ball approach. I had brought him a $150,000 second-mortgage loan application from a desperate builder who was willing to put up nine small apartment properties as collat- eral. My professor expressed an immediate interest in the loan, and when I relayed that fact to the prospective borrower, he be- came very anxious to have him come to town and inspect his properties. The situation was ideal for my professor: The prospec- tive borrower was anxious; my professor could care less. If you’re on the anxious end of this kind of equation, you have two strikes against you before negotiations even begin. After my professor inspected the prospective borrower’s prop- erties, he shook his head discouragingly and said that he would need more collateral in order to make the loan. The owner pro- tested, insisting that the nine properties he was prepared to put up as security constituted more than sufficient collateral. My professor courteously thanked the builder for his time, then said

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 59

Type Number One Isn’t Sorry 59

that, under the circumstances, he would be leaving for the airport right away to try to catch an earlier flight back to New York. It was an eye-opening experience to witness a professional intimi- dator in action. The prospective borrower, desperate for cash, looked like he was going to have apoplexy. He quickly backed off and agreed to give my professor, as additional collateral, a first mortgage on a 10-acre parcel of land that he said was in the process of being re- zoned for industrial usage. My professor not only accepted the land as additional collat- eral, but, as we got nearer the closing, insisted on inserting a clause in the loan agreement stipulating that if the land was not rezoned within 12 months, he could require the borrower to pay off an additional $20,000 on the principal of the loan. This struck me as a rather harsh condition, particularly since it appeared that the nine apartment properties alone were more than sufficient collateral for the second mortgage. But, as it turned out, I had only witnessed the tip of the iceberg. My professor’s greatest moves were yet to come. Just as it began to appear that all the details for a closing had been worked out, and with the borrower looking 10 years older than when the negotiations had begun, my professor—“after re- viewing the figures very carefully”—said there was no way that he could make a $150,000 loan based on the collateral they had been discussing. He told the borrower that due to this lack of col- lateral, $100,000 was the biggest loan he was willing to make. At that point, the borrower became outwardly hostile. He adamantly refused to the lower loan figure, which prompted my professor to once again thank him for his time and indicate that he had better things to work on. Result? You guessed it—the bor- rower limped back to the “negotiating table.” They finally “com- promised” at $105,000—meaning that the borrower had to put up more collateral for less money! By this time the borrower was beyond desperate, and rest

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 60

60 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

assured that his desperation did not go unnoticed by my profes- sor. Before he was finished, my prof took advantage of his intimi- dating posture to land two final blows. First, he required that the borrower deposit with him, each month, one-twelfth of the annual real estate taxes on each of the properties. This meant that the professor would have the use of the borrower’s tax money until the real estate taxes were actually due, which in turn deprived the borrower of the use of his own funds. The second and final blow, however, was the coup de grace. When my Type Number One professor examined the “rent rolls” for each of the properties, he noticed that one of the build- ings, the construction of which had just been completed, still had a considerable number of vacancies. He insisted that $20,000 of the $105,000 loan be retained by him until that property reached an occupancy rate of approximately 80 percent. The same pro- tests on the part of the borrower; the same threats of departure on the part of my professor; the same result: The borrower ended up agreeing to all of the professor’s conditions. Looking back on this deal, I now realize that it was actually just a matter of at what point the lender was willing to display mercy. He had the cash; the borrower was desperate. He had the staying power; the borrower was running out of time. He was intimidating; the borrower was intimidated. It was my Type Number One professor’s favorite—and only—kind of deal: totally one-sided. Again, in retrospect, I had the good fortune of earning while learning. I received a nominal loan-brokerage fee for my work, while having the honor to observe, at close range, how a high- level Type Number One plays the game. It was painful to witness— sort of like watching a lion devour a gazelle on one of those animal shows on TV—but very educational. As the professor and I walked out of the building where the closing had taken place, I told him that the borrower seemed like a nice guy and that I hoped he would be able to abide by all the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 61

Type Number One Isn’t Sorry 61

conditions of the loan agreement. To which my professor dis- played his best Godfatherlike smile and replied, “That’s not pos- sible.” Puzzled, I asked him what he meant by that, whereupon he said, “If you take the trouble to read the agreement carefully, you’ll see that he was technically in default the moment he signed it.” Now that’s what you call a practical course at Screw U! In the months following the closing, the old man began to take a personal liking to me. I think he was impressed by my persistence and attention to detail, and, because of his own no-nonsense nature, my straightforward manner. I was neat and accurate in my presentations, and if additional information was needed to decide whether or not to proceed further with a deal, I obtained it immediately, even if it meant traveling a great dis- tance at my own expense to secure the necessary details. Fortu- nately for me, I had been well aware of the importance of being willing to go the extra mile from having observed my father’s attitude toward work from the time I was a small child. Early on it appeared to me that my professor realized that it was in his best interest to see me make money. He obviously rea- soned that the more money I made, the more I would be encour- aged to work hard to bring him the best deals I could find. So even though he was an orthodox Type Number One, he also qualified as one of those rare exceptions I spoke about earlier; i.e., with re- gard to his relationship with me, my getting paid actually bene- fited him in the long run. Further, because it was also in my best interest to see him make money, I went out of my way to protect my professor in every deal. To many of our clients, I became cynically known as his watchdog. If there was one thing I recognized even then, it was on which side my bread was buttered. The old man and I had a wonderful relationship, because it was based on the most hon- est foundation that any business relationship can have: value for value. As harsh as he was with me at times, I not only acquired a

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 62

62 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

great deal of knowledge from my Type Number One professor, I actually grew fond of him. (I think it might have been his razor- sharp teeth that held me in awe.) Regardless of his take-no- prisoners philosophy, I respected him for his candor. I would hate to think how much longer it might have taken me to learn many crucial realities of the Businessworld Jungle had I not had the op- portunity to work closely with this Type Number One professor for two solid years. He died a short time after I went on to gradu- ate school, but, wherever he is today, I’d be surprised if he isn’t still threatening to go to the airport and closing one-sided deals.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 63

Chapter 7

Type Number Two Isn’t Sorry That He Grabbed Your Chips, Because––In Spite of His Assurances to the Contrary–– That Was His Intention from the Outset

iven that a Type Number One is easy to spot, there’s no Gexcuse for not learning how to defend yourself against him. And a Type Number Three, because of his sincerity and easygoing manner, can usually be made to behave by simply confronting him with the proper legal tools. But being trapped in a cage with a Type Number Two is not a good idea even for an ex- perienced, educated Jungle inhabitant. Until you learn the art of dealing with Type Number Twos, your progress in the Business- world Jungle will be painstakingly slow—and unpleasant. When a Type Number Two performs chip-replacement sur- gery on your wallet, all he is saying to you is: I meant from the outset to cut off your fingers when you reached for your chips, even though I had assured you that that was not my intention. 63 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 64

64 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

A Type Number Two is treacherous, not only because he is hard to recognize, but because he’s a meat eater—in fact, the most vicious of all carnivores. To put it in perspective, think of it this way: A Type Number Two is to the Businessworld Jungle as Tyrannosaurus Rex is to Jurassic Park. Because he’s cunning, a Type Number Two can sometimes be mistaken for either a Type Number One or Type Number Three. Deviousness is his stock in trade. It was not until I had completed Anti-Deceit Measures 401 with my Type Number Two professor that I was prepared to graduate from Screw U. Not that I had never encountered a Type Number Two before. It’s just that in the past I had failed to recog- nize members of this cannibal sect for what they really were, let alone study their sinister methods. Like his fellow faculty members, Types Number One and Three, my Type Number Two professor at Screw U. was not only a perfect model of his species, but a great teacher as well. He was co-owner of an apartment-development company that had built a significant number of large apartment projects in the Midwest and on the East Coast. My initial contact with him came about as a result of making cold calls in an effort to solicit new second- mortgage deals. He expressed an immediate interest in meeting with me, and I made an appointment to come visit him. When I went to his office for our first face-to-face discussion, I was impressed to the point of being in awe. My Type Number Two professor spent an inordinate amount of time expounding on the virtues of dealing only with people who possessed buckets of integrity and the highest ethical standards—like himself, for example—an almost sure sign that the person with whom you are speaking is a rapist, murderer, or, worst of all, an unethical real estate developer. To boot, he casually tossed around the names of a sampling of competitors as examples of people whom he con- sidered to be of questionable repute. Talk about holier than thou, my new mentor was in a class by himself. And talk about gullible, The Tortoise ate up every

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 65

Type Number Two Isn’t Sorry 65

word. I hadn’t been so enamored since the first time I had laid eyes on my beloved Court Holder in organic chemistry lab years earlier. I once again found myself conjuring up fantasies of an au- tographed picture hanging over my hearth. I sat there listening to his fecal chatter as though I had just undergone a discount lobotomy, nodding my head up and down on cue to show that I was in total agreement with such clichés as, “Life is too short to deal with unethical people.” I oohed and aahed as he name- dropped big institutions that had financed some of his projects or supposedly wanted to lend him money for future develop- ments. He was wearing a white hat so tall that it nearly touched the ceiling, and his Saddam-like grin had the aura of a neon sign flashing the words, “Trust me.” When we finally got down to talking business, he said that his company “could possibly use a couple million dollars to take ad- vantage of some other opportunities.” (Unbeknownst to me at the time, this was wheeler-dealer code for: “I’m in desperate financial straits, and need a quick cash injection to avoid bankruptcy.”) My Type Number Two professor mentioned that he owned a large apartment development in St. Louis, and that he might be interested in selling it outright rather than obtaining a second mortgage. He indicated, however, that it would take a purchase price in the area of $10 million for him to seriously consider sell- ing. Here, too, I was too much of a neophyte to understand that no matter how convincing a prospective seller may appear to be about not being interested in selling his property for less than a certain price, he is almost always either lying or will eventually cave in and lower his price when a serious buyer enters the pic- ture. Nothing changes a seller’s view of the world quicker than a checkbook being waved in his face. As my Type Number Two professor continued to pontificate, I did some rough figuring and concluded that if I was successful in selling his property, I could earn a commission in the area of $200,000-$300,000 based upon the Board of Realtors’ suggested commission scale. Such thinking only served again to demon-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 66

“Listen up, greenhorn, it’s important to deal only with people of integrity––like me, for example.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 67

Type Number Two Isn’t Sorry 67

strate how much of a greenhorn I was at the time. I simply wasn’t sophisticated enough to understand that sellers could care less what a Board of Realtors thinks their members’ commissions should be. Nonetheless, I was excited about my first opportunity to get a shot at earning a jumbo-size commission. I told my Type Num- ber Two professor that I was confident I could find a buyer for his St. Louis apartment development if he would furnish me with the necessary data. I gave him a long list of items I thought I would need in order to put together a proper presentation, and he agreed to have his staff compile the information and get it to me within a week or so. Now, all I needed was a little something in writing from him and I would be all set. Sadly, however, I was so intimidated by his arrogant, self-righteous attitude that I was very meek in request- ing a written understanding regarding my commission. As I ver- bally stumbled around like the world-class reptilian wimp that I was, he interrupted me and commenced another sanctimonious lecture. He so dynamically emphasized his unparalleled reputa- tion for honesty and integrity that I actually felt ashamed that I had dared to ask for a signed agreement. In the privacy of my mind, I chastised myself for being so disrespectful, for having the gall to ask this towering model of morality for a written docu- ment. Didn’t I realize that when you deal with a man of such unparalleled integrity, you don’t need anything in writing? Clearly, my Type Number Two professor was the intimida- tor, and I was the intimidatee. Backing off gracefully, I assured him that my asking for an agreement was only a formality, and that in his case I was not concerned about having something in writing. Fluttering my eye- lashes in blissful ignorance, I returned to my office and began lay- ing out a game plan to market my first major deal. After my Court Holder experience in organic chemistry class years earlier, I never thought I could become so infatuated again. Young love is

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 68

68 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

beautiful to behold, especially when you spend most of your life hiding inside a shell. After I received all the facts and figures from my Type Num- ber Two professor’s office, I made arrangements to fly to St. Louis to personally inspect his property. There was big money involved, and I was determined to do such a first-class job in all aspects of this deal that the seller would actually feel good about paying my commission. (Yes, I am blushing a bright shade of green as I write this). As quickly as possible, I sent letters to a number of the biggest real estate buyers in the country, briefly describing the St. Louis property and inquiring as to whether they might have an interest in an apartment development of this size. To those who answered in the affirmative, I sent a detailed presentation. Fi- nally, after about two weeks, I followed up with a phone call to each prospect. One company, in particular, indicated a serious interest in the deal, which resulted in an exchange of numerous phone calls and letters between us. I then made my second critical mistake. (The first, of course, was that I had allowed the seller to intimi- date me into believing that I had no need for a signed commission agreement.) Instead of registering the prospective buyer by certi- fied mail, I relayed offers and counter-offers between him and the seller by telephone. During this period, however, I did not men- tion the buyer’s name to the seller. Then, the inevitable: My professor began to smell the aroma of money, and reared his chip-snatching Type Number Two head. He told me that he had just returned from New York where he had met with someone who, by coincidence, worked for the buyer with whom I had been negotiating. He said that a mutual acquaintance had introduced him to the buyer, and that the buyer had informed him that he had been negotiating through me for the purchase of his St. Louis apartment development. In classic Type Number Two fashion, the seller proceeded to tell me that he felt no obligation to me regarding a sale of his

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 69

Type Number Two Isn’t Sorry 69

St. Louis property to my buyer, notwithstanding the fact that it was I who had submitted the property to him. The words honesty and integrity had suddenly disappeared from his vocabulary. True to his species, when the chips were on the table, he dropped his phony, self-righteous verbiage and warned me, in no uncertain terms, that I had better not reach for my chips. I was stunned, demoralized, and confused. I tried to pull my- self together and take a firm stand, but the tougher I got, the nas- tier the my professor became. Finally, I committed one of the most unforgivable sins of deal-making: I began to press. That quickly brought the matter to a head, and from there things got very emotional. With a straight face, my professor argued that he had found out that I had simply “contacted a lot of prospective buyers” and that “anybody could do that.” Gee, and here I thought that’s what a real estate agent was supposed to do. Although it was clear that I had been responsible not only for calling the buyer’s attention to the property, but for motivating his interest in it, the reality was that I was dealing from a position of weakness. Oatmeal brain that I was, I had no commission agreement with the seller, nor did I have so much as a certified letter showing that I had registered the buyer with the seller. All that I had were what the seller had originally told to me would be all that I would ever need—his honesty and integrity. It was obvious that tiptoeing was not going to get me any- where, so I fell back on my ace in the hole that had landed me my first real estate commission—the $6,500 I had earned in the Cincinnati deal—and called my attorney into the fray. This time, however, I was dealing with a hard-core Type Number Two, an outrageous flaunter of white hats whose unspoken motto was: Cheating isn’t everything, it’s the only thing! When my attorney stepped into the picture, the seller and his in-house criminal (er, attorney) shamelessly laid their cards on the table, pointing out the third and most critical mistake I had made. Not only did I not have a signed commission agree- ment or a certified mail slip proving that I had registered the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 70

70 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

buyer with the seller, I was missing the most important legal tool of all: a real estate license in Missouri, the state where the prop- erty was located. The seller’s attorney gleefully informed my lawyer and me that, in fact, Missouri had a law prohibiting unlicensed per- sons from working on the sale of properties located within the state. Accordingly, in the event of a sale, a seller had no legal obli- gation to pay a commission to anyone who did not have a real es- tate license in Missouri, even if the agent was licensed in another state. My attorney quickly checked it out and confirmed that the seller’s attorney was absolutely right. (This was my first recollection of having an instinctive liber- tarian thought. The idea that the government could anoint itself to have the power to ordain who should and should not be al- lowed to earn a living selling real estate seemed both oppressive and outrageous to me. Later in my career I was able to figure out why those who are already licensed—be they real estate agents, doctors, hair dressers, gambling casinos, or pimps—are almost al- ways in favor of ever tougher licensing laws: It keeps the compe- tition out! Welcome to the world of government licensing scams, Mr. T.) I assessed the playing field, and quickly determined that what I was involved in here was nothing less than a legal mug- ging. In fact, had I not had the good sense to call in my attorney at the eleventh hour, I feel certain that I would have walked away from this repugnant experience chipless. It was only because of the Universal Attorney-to-Attorney Respect Rule that I ended up being given a “tip” from my Type Number Two professor. His at- torney told my lawyer that if I kept my mouth shut and stayed out of the way, his client would be generous and throw me a $20,000 bone. Given that it was a bone or nothing, I chose the bone. It wasn’t the $200,000+ commission I had expected to re- ceive, but it certainly helped me to have an even greater apprecia- tion for the Universal Attorney-to-Attorney Respect Rule—an invaluable tool when employed on your behalf.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 71

Type Number Two Isn’t Sorry 71

My Type Number Two professor at Screw U. had taught me well. I had made one of the biggest apartment-development sales in the history of St. Louis, and walked away with but a token fee amounting to about one-fourth of one percent of the selling price of the property. I carefully analyzed my mistakes and concluded that in my first major deal I had been missing not one, not two, but all three of the legal tools a real estate agent needs to protect himself. Because my professor had been such a master of his highly skilled craft, I felt confident that I could spot a Type Number Two pretty quickly in the future. I now recognized that whenever a person spent an inordinate amount of time expounding on the importance of honesty and integrity, it was a signal for me to pull out my can of roach killer or, preferably, avoid dealing with him at all. I also vowed that if someone refused to sign a commission agreement with me in the future—regardless of the reason—I would assume that he was a Type Number Two and walk away from the deal. As with my organic-chemistry-class Court Holder many years earlier, I thank you, Type Number Two professor, wherever you may be. I vividly recall your telling me that you would like to do some building in warm weather climates, so I’m sincerely happy for you that you’re going to get your wish when you pass on to the next world.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 72

Chapter 8

My Senior Year at Screw U.

he St. Louis fiasco I discussed in the previous chapter (of- Tficially listed in the Screw U. archives as “the Missouri ”) was a major turning point in my career, be- cause it forced me to separate reality from wishes—the reality that the game of business is played in a jungle rather than on a nursery school playground; the reality that there are only three types of people in the business world, and that all three are out to get your chips; the reality that I had been dealing from a position of weakness and, as a result, had been repeatedly and unmerci- fully intimidated. I vowed that I would find a way to strengthen my posture, and that I would begin to earn, and receive, serious commis- sions. However, I had not yet determined just how to go about ac- 72 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 73

My Senior Year at Screw U. 73

complishing this objective. Still reeling from the Missouri Mas- sacre, I needed time to clear my head in order to formulate a workable game plan. It took a little over a year for me to put the finishing touches on a reality-based philosophy that I felt confident I could imple- ment. While the lessons from the Missouri Massacre were fer- menting in my mind, along with those learned from my Type Number One and Type Number Three professors, I needed more experience in learning how to deal with the frustrations and hu- miliations of the Businessworld Jungle before I would be prepared to make a significant move up the food chain. My experiences during the next year—my last year at Screw U.—gave me the final preparation I needed. Three experiences, in particular, stand out in my mind in this regard, experiences that showed me not only how to survive, but to come out on top in the foreboding wilderness of the Busi- nessworld Jungle. All three were second-mortgage deals, and in each case the fact that I was dealing from a position of weakness was glaringly apparent to everyone involved. These experiences also underscored for me the inefficiency of working on small deals. Following are brief accounts of those final three credits that I needed to earn my undergraduate degree from Screw U.

Credit No. 1: Even though I had received $20,000 for selling the St. Louis property, things were still pretty tight for me finan- cially, which I increasingly came to realize was at the heart of my problems. It’s a difficult problem to hide. My posture was weak precisely because I needed every commission so badly. Even if you’re vigilant when it comes to being careful about what you say, your facial expressions, your body language, and the tone of your voice tend to give you away. And the person on whom you are counting to pay your fee can usually sense your anxiety; you need the money, and he knows it. Such was the atmosphere at one of my second-mortgage

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 74

74 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

closings that took place shortly after the Missouri Massacre. My Type Number One professor had rejected this particular second- mortgage proposal, so I had taken it to another lender. The one thing that stands out in my mind about this deal is that I worked harder on it than I did on many of my later closings that resulted in huge commissions, yet I was paid—very begrudgingly—a fee of only $1,250 for my services. The critical factor was that I needed the $1,250 very badly, and I let it show. As a result, I allowed my- self to be intimidated. I can clearly recall the builder’s attorney telling me at the closing, in so many words, that if I was a good boy and kept my mouth shut (shades of St. Louis), I might get the $1,250 that was coming to me. As I sat there, humiliated, I felt a great deal of self- disdain for allowing myself to get into a situation where I was the epitome of the proverbial 97-pound weakling. What errors in judgment had I made that caused me to be down on my hands and knees, groveling like a beggar hoping to be thrown a few crumbs? Finally, after many sadistic attempts on the part of the bor- rower’s attorney to increase my anxiety level, the $1,250 bone was relinquished. If tortoises could bark, Legalman probably would have made me stand on my haunches and give it a go be- fore tossing me my meager reward. It was one of the most degrad- ing episodes of my undergraduate days at Screw U. As I sat through the closing, playing the toady role to the hilt and meekly doing whatever I was told, I vowed to rectify my pos- ture in the future so I would never again have to suffer such degradation. I was determined to find a way to maneuver myself into a position of strength to the point of becoming virtually intimidation-proof. I also made up my mind, right there at the execution (read, closing), that I would work only on deals that held the potential for a payoff big enough to justify my time and effort. Barking was bad enough, but barking for $1,250 was shameful. It was getting near graduation time at Screw U., and I was tired of working on deals to the point of exhaustion, only to end up hav-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 75

“Down, boy, down. Be good and keep your mouth shut, and I might throw it to you.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 76

76 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

ing to beg for my commissions, most of which were penny ante in size.

Credit No. 2: My second credit involved another second-mortgage loan that my Type Number One professor had turned down, so I submitted it to another lender in New York. I made up my mind that I was going to go for a substantial fee in this deal, though I realized I would have to structure it in such a way that the bor- rower would not feel as though it was coming out of “his” money (shades of my first-ever real estate closing in Cincinnati). As second mortgages go, it was a large loan request— $500,000—but I felt that the collateral was strong enough to sup- port such a loan. The lender seemed to agree, and expressed a serious interest. He sent a representative to inspect the property, after which I flew to New York to meet with the lender person- ally and see if there was anything I could do to help expedite a closing. At the meeting, I explained that I had quoted the prospec- tive borrower an interest rate in the area of 13 percent plus a front- end “discount” fee of 10 percent. I also informed the lender that, for psychological reasons, I had told the borrower that he (the lender) would be responsible for paying my fee. I reasoned that if the borrower paid me directly, he would protest my being paid a $15,000 fee (which I had built into the 10 percent up-front discount). However, if my fee was tacked on to the lender’s up-front discount—much the same as in my Cincinnati deal—the borrower would think of it as coming out of the lender’s pocket rather than his. It was, of course, pure pacification, but I had already learned how important it was to humor borrowers and sellers. When people cry out to be deluded, it’s inhumane not to accommodate them—especially if they’re sellers or borrowers. I proceeded to explain to the lender that he needed only a 7 percent discount in order to bring his effective interest rate up to the normal backbreaking levels he was used to extracting, and

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 77

My Senior Year at Screw U. 77

that he could pay me the additional 3 percent discount as my $15,000 fee. Result: Explosion! The lender went absolutely berserk. Dur- ing the ensuing heated discussion, he said two things that would ring in my ears for the remainder of my days at Screw U. First, he said, “You have a lot of nerve trying to earn $15,000 on one deal; why, you’re only a broker.” Bam! Right between the eyes. Talk about painting a clear picture of how I was perceived by a lender. How could I help but see the light when this killer-lender was shining it right in my eyes? In reality, he was actually doing me a favor by indirectly reminding me just how weak my posture was. I was only a broker, and therefore had no right to earn $15,000 on one deal. Shame on me for trying to grab more than a petite sliver of the monstrous loan pie. Of course, it was all right for the lender to charge that much, and more, for such “services” as prepaid interest or “privileges” such as prepayment penalties. Why? Because he had the right posture; he was dealing from a position of strength. One of the fascinating things about the human psyche is that people don’t begrudge a wealthy person making money, but they very much resent someone of lesser means making “too much” money. I had been found guilty of trying to violate one of the most sacred, unwritten rules of the Jungle—the rule that little guys don’t have a right to make serious money. Marie Antoinette said, “Let them eat cake,” which was kind of cute. But this New York money gouger with a Pol Pot personality went one step further and seemed to be saying, “Let loan brokers eat—but not too much.” The lender’s second remark was even more unbelievable. He said it was “unconscionable” for me to charge a 3 percent broker- age fee for the placement of a second-mortgage loan. It was a re- markable statement considering that he was commonly referred to as the Doctor Death of the second-mortgage business. Here was a man who had built his fortune on the misfortune and finan-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 78

“You have a lot of nerve trying to earn $15,000 on one deal. Don’t you understand that you’re only a broker?”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 79

My Senior Year at Screw U. 79

cial desperation of others, who earned interest rates of 15 percent and more (which in those days bordered on loan-shark rates), used hidden-charge gimmicks such as “prepaid interest,” “discount fees,” and “prepayment penalties” to up his take, and who was now proclaiming that it was unconscionable for me to be making $15,000 on one deal. I had visions of the lender’s remains sitting on a supermarket shelf, neatly packaged as Soylent Green. The Theory of Relativity comes into play here, because rela- tive to the kind of profits the lender was used to making, my fee was insignificant. But relative to the crumbs that loan brokers usually have to settle for, my fee was “unconscionable.” It was clear to me that the only way an individual could ever hope to have his “relativity status” upgraded was to find a way to change his posture. It was a matter of perception, of being thought of as one of those important guys who had a right to earn big money. The deal, as you might have guessed, never closed. Why? Be- cause I had dared to step out of line by attempting to earn a mean- ingful fee—without being prepared to see it through. But with graduation time at Screw U. near at hand, I was just about ready to put the final pieces of my reality-based philosophy into place and elevate my posture to a level where it would be difficult for Jungle predators to intimidate me.

Credit No. 3: My final course at Screw U.—the one that tied the ribbon around my diploma—involved a second-mortgage loan on an apartment development in Tampa. Having fulfilled most of my undergraduate requirements, I was experienced enough to be able to quickly spot the warning signs that indicated that I would have trouble collecting my fee if the deal closed. By this time, getting the borrower to sign a fee agreement with me was a given, and I didn’t need a real estate license in Florida, because there was no sale involved. I was again shooting for an “unconscionable” fee of $15,000, only this time it was even more unconscionable, because it was based on a much smaller loan than the one in my previous deal. Also, this time around

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 80

80 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

my fee wasn’t buried in the lender’s front-end discount. I put all my cards on the table from the outset, clearly spelling out in our agreement that I was to receive my fee directly from the borrower. As things progressed and it began to look like the deal was going to close, I became so certain that the borrower had no in- tention of paying me my $15,000 fee that I started customizing a plan to protect myself. First, I purposely did not give the borrower any indication that I intended to be present at the closing, be- cause I didn’t want him to be on guard. I was pretty certain that it would never occur to him that a loan broker would fly halfway across the country to collect a fee at a closing, because a typical masochist-broker ignorantly and naively waits for his commis- sion check to be mailed to him. (If you ever ventured into a loan broker’s or real estate agent’s office and were surprised to see a cobweb-covered skeleton—cigar butt between its teeth—sitting behind the desk, you were probably looking at a broker or agent who was waiting for his commission check to arrive.) I figured that as long as it didn’t occur to the borrower that I might attend the closing, he would not focus, in advance, on making certain that I wasn’t allowed in the closing room on judg- ment day. I purposely avoided discussing my commission with him during our many telephone discussions, which must have had him cackling to himself about how easy the upcoming chip theft was going to be. As it turned out, I actually had a very important appoint- ment scheduled for the same day as the Tampa closing, so, with- out announcing it to anyone in advance, I sent an assistant to Tampa the night before the loan was to be finalized. I told him to show up at the closing the next morning, be very friendly and matter-of-fact, and present my signed fee agreement to the attor- neys representing the borrower and lender. Given that he had a law degree, I felt there was a good chance that he could invoke the Universal Attorney-to-Attorney Respect Rule as a way of pro- tecting my fee.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 81

My Senior Year at Screw U. 81

The next evening, my assistant called me long distance to re- late what had taken place at the closing. Laughingly, he told me that the borrower had done a double-take when he walked through the door. Then, after a lot of mumbling and stalling, the borrower finally handed over a $15,000 check to him. The bad news, however, was that the check was not certified! Even though I had had very little sleep over the past several days and was exhausted from having worked without a break since early that morning, the adrenalin started flowing at mach speed when I heard that the check wasn’t certified. As early as Jungle 401 you learn that an uncertified check should be viewed as no check at all. I quickly called the airlines and found that if I hurried I had just enough time to throw a few things in a bag and make it to the airport for a late-evening flight to Tampa. On top of everything else, I hadn’t eaten a thing all day, and I was ravenous. My men- tal scales instantly weighed the two options. One option was to give in to my and exhaustion and fly to Tampa the next morning—very possibly too late to cash the $15,000 check. The other option was to ignore my hunger and exhaustion and fly to Tampa that night so I could get an early start on protecting my $15,000. Hunger and exhaustion never had a chance. I grabbed a few necessities, checked to make sure that I had some cash, credit cards, and, above all, identification, and jumped in my car. As is always the case with late-evening flights, the trip was miserable, and I arrived in Tampa feeling like a corpse. My assistant met me at the airport, after which we hurried to the mo- tel where he was staying. I quickly checked in, then sat down to discuss strategy with him. As you would expect, I always counted heavily on the hare making the mistake of pausing at some point. Maybe he would stop off to have a martini, or eat lunch, or get some other work done, or just put “it” off until tomorrow because it was so late in the day. Whatever the cause might be, I had developed great faith that my opponent would always become lax at some point

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 82

82 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

along the way and give me just enough time to make certain that the Tortoise and Hare Theory took effect. (If you slow down enough to look over your right shoulder, I’ll pass you on the left; if you slow down enough to look over your left shoulder, I’ll pass you on the right; etc.) My cross-country trip had been based on an assumption and a gamble. The assumption was that the borrower was going to stop payment on the $15,000 check; the gamble was that he would make the mistake of procrastinating and not take care of the matter until the bank opened the next morning. I grabbed a couple hours of restless sleep at the motel, then dragged myself out of bed at the crack of dawn. I was taking no chances on not being at the front door of the bank when it opened. I felt as though I hadn’t slept in a week, but a cold shower and the thought of $15,000 was stimulating enough to keep me moving. Finally, there I was—black business suit, black-rimmed sun- glasses, and black briefcase—standing in front of the bank, wait- ing for it to open. Needless to say, I was the first customer through the door that morning. I walked directly to a teller’s win- dow and presented the $15,000 check for payment. Calmly laying out my personal identification items on the counter, I explained that I would like the $15,000 in cash, with as many large bills as possible (so I could fit it all into my briefcase). It was a scene right out of Scarface. You haven’t lived until you’ve walked into a strange bank, in a faraway town—wearing a black suit, black-rimmed sunglasses, and carrying a black briefcase—and tried to cash a $15,000 check. I think everyone in the bank assumed that I was connected with the Mafia. Within minutes, a whole cadre of bank employees was buzzing around trying to figure out what to do about this un- heard-of request. Someone—a strange someone at that—was ac- tually demanding that a bank come up with real, live cash in place of a check! The nerve of someone to want cash.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 83

My Senior Year at Screw U. 83

A bank officer finally “took charge” and explained that he would have to call the person who had endorsed the check to make certain that it was not a forged endorsement. (The check had been disbursed on an attorney’s trust account directly to the borrower, and the borrower had then endorsed it over to me.) I argued that the check was drawn on his bank, that he could examine the attorney’s signature on the front of the check to con- firm that it was valid, and that the only other thing he needed to do was confirm that the funds were in the account. I insisted that there was no reason to involve the endorser. I knew that a call to the borrower/endorser would be an invitation to a dispute that in all likelihood would result in payment on the check being stopped—or at least held up. No luck; the bank officer insisted on making the call. My wheels started turning again, faster this time. I thought to myself that even if the borrower was intending to stop pay- ment on the check, he probably had not had time to think through just how he was going to do it, because it was drawn on the trust account of the attorney representing the lender. After all, he had been taken by surprise when my assistant showed up at the closing. I was further counting on the fact that, like a true hare, he would get sidetracked for awhile. I believed there was a reasonable chance that the attorney who had disbursed the money for the lender might not know what the borrower’s inten- tions were (assuming that his intentions were, in fact, to try to somehow stop payment on the check). I quickly blurted out that I thought the endorser of the check had said that he would be out of town that day, and that the banker would probably have more success calling the attorney who had originally signed the check. I emphasized the logic of my suggestion by pointing out that the attorney was a customer of the bank. Success! The banker took my suggestion and called the attorney instead. To say the least, Legalman was quite surprised to hear that I was in town, and even more surprised to hear that I

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 84

84 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

was at the bank trying to cash the $15,000 check. Nonetheless, he confirmed that he had signed the check and had watched the borrower endorse it in my name. Then came “The Scene.” It was destined to rank right up there years later with “The Drive” (John Elway), “The Pass” (Joe ), and “The Catch” (Dwight Clark). There I was, stand- ing in front of the teller’s cage in my black suit and black-rimmed sunglasses, stuffing $15,000 cash into my black briefcase as a se- curity guard dutifully stood by. I was so focused on securing pos- session of the $15,000 that it was not until I clicked shut the latches on my bulging briefcase that I noticed that everyone in the bank was staring at me. “Crying all the way to the bank” is an old cliché, but in this case I laughed all the way from the bank. I have no way of knowing if it ever came to pass, but the thought that the borrower might have been calling the bank or Legalman to see if there was some way that he could stop pay- ment on the check—while I was on my way to the airport carry- ing a briefcase filled with $15,000 cash—made the nightmare of the previous 12 hours a small price to pay. On the plane trip home, as I laid back in my seat, thoroughly exhausted, I told myself that the time had arrived. No more crawling around on my hands and knees and no more penny-ante deals. From now on I was going to display a high-level posture, and the money was going to be big. Graduation time at Screw U. had arrived, and my impeccable education had prepared me to go forth into the Businessworld Jungle and start hunting for big game.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 85

“$13,100 . . . $13,200 . . . $13,300 . . .”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 86

Chapter 9

My Graduation from Screw U.

fter completing my Tampa credit at Screw U., it was time Ato organize my experiences into a workable, reality-based philosophy, then lay out a specific plan for implement- ing it. My first major decision in this regard was to switch my efforts from second-mortgage loans to the sale of large commer- cial properties. At first I was a bit apprehensive about no longer specializing in second-mortgage loans, because I had worked very hard to learn the business and establish many excellent contacts. When I finally made the decision, however, the reasoning I used was des- tined to become an integral part of my thinking for the rest of my life. The reasoning I am referring to is encapsulated in the Leapfrog Theory, which states: No one has an obligation—moral, 86 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 87

My Graduation from Screw U. 87

legal, or otherwise—to “work his way up through the ranks.” Every human being possesses an inalienable right to make a uni- lateral decision to redirect his career and begin operating on a higher level at any time he believes he is prepared to do so. If one aspires to great accomplishments, he must recognize that the quickest way to the top is not by fighting his way through the pack, but by leapfrogging over it. There is, however, a catch. If you aren’t prepared to rise above the competition, then, in spite of any self-proclamations, the realities of the Business- world Jungle will knock you right back into the pack in short or- der. In other words, though you have a perfect right to proclaim that you’re ready to move upward, no amount of chest-pounding can overcome truth. Conversely, the more you’re prepared, the better your chances of staying on the higher level you have unilaterally chosen for yourself. It’s enormously frustrating to know in your heart that you’re capable of bigger accomplishments, yet spend most of your time and energy fighting day-to-day battles in the midst of rank- and-file mediocrity. But if you’re truly prepared to move up the ladder in your profession, there is no law that requires you to be patient and wait for conventional-wisdom adherents to anoint you. Put another way, the easiest way to eliminate most of your competition is to simply refuse to acknowledge it. Without au- thorization from anyone else, and without being saddled by guilt feelings or ill-founded moral obligations, you simply take it upon yourself to begin operating on a higher level. You don’t have to wait for industry bigwigs, society, or any other abstract entity to christen you an expert in your chosen field. (Interestingly, years after I had written Winning through In- timidation, a well-known doctor in Los Angeles, who was mar- ried to a famous actress, confided in me that if he had not read Winning through Intimidation and implemented the Leapfrog Theory, he never would have had the courage to leave his home town, move to Los Angeles, and become a “celebrity” doctor.)

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 88

88 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

Likewise, had I not implemented the Leapfrog Theory, I probably would still be begging for crumbs begrudgingly thrown to me by unappreciative second-mortgage borrowers. Instead I was able to receive, less than five months later, a sales commis- sion that was almost twice the combined total of all the commis- sions I had received during my first three years in the real estate business. Once I made the decision to apply the Leapfrog Theory to my career, I reanalyzed my most memorable experiences prior to and during my years at Screw U., extracted the lessons learned from them, and worked on putting it all together into a workable phi- losophy. Most of this was accomplished sitting on a big rock next to a river, thinking and taking notes. And the more I thought, the more I became convinced that intimidation had been at the root of most of my problems when it came to being short-chipped in the deals I had worked on. Recognizing this fact motivated me to devise and implement specific techniques to protect myself against the tactics of the kinds of intimidators who had blud- geoned me in the past. In fact, I became convinced, and still am today, that the problems most people encounter in trying to achieve their objectives—in business, personal relationships, and virtually all other facets of life—stem from being intimidated by others. For real estate agents, the intimidation comes from both buyers and sellers (or, in the case of second-mortgage-loans, borrowers and lenders). But regardless of one’s business, the problem is the same—being intimidated into allowing others to control your destiny. Stated in theory form, what I’m talking about here is the Theory of Intimidation, which states: The results a person achieves are inversely proportionate to the degree to which he is intimidated. Clearly, it was in the deals in which I had been the most in- timidated that I had taken the greatest financial beatings, and it was in the deals in which I had been intimidated the least that I had walked away with the most chips.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 89

My Graduation from Screw U. 89

While I felt confident that I had zeroed in on the crux of the issue, doing something about it was another matter alto- gether. The first step toward solving a problem is to analyze its causes. Why and how had I been cast in the role of intimidatee in past dealings? I felt confident that I had more knowledge and ability than most of the principals with whom I had dealt, but knowledge and ability seemed to have no effect on our respective positions as intimidator and intimidatee. Based on firsthand ex- perience, it was apparent to me that the most relevant factor in my ongoing dilemma was my posture, a conclusion that pro- duced the Posture Theory, which states: It’s not what you say or do that counts, but what your posture is when you say or do it. In real estate brokerage, for example, if your posture sug- gests that you’re “only a broker” (to borrow the words of the second-mortgage lender who believed that my fee was “uncon- scionable”), and the principals see you as nothing more than an unnecessary annoyance in their deal, you’re going to end up being intimidated no matter how great your knowledge and ability and no matter how impressive your words and actions are. So in my mind, the overriding question became: What can I do to improve my weak posture? Clearly, it was critical to fi- gure out a way to maneuver myself into a position of apparent power. When I thought of power, I remembered my old Type Number One professor in the second-mortgage business who was the epitome of someone whose posture was impenetrable, and at the heart of his posture power was wealth. His posture was evi- dent to prospective borrowers without his ever having to utter a word. However, I also recalled a number of people whom I had known to be generally respected—even feared—who played the game from a position of strength, notwithstanding their lack of wealth. Obviously, these people had something else going for them that had nothing to do with money, something that re- sulted in a powerful image. In cases like these, I concluded that it was a matter of perception overruling reality. In life in general,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 90

90 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

when it comes to substance versus perception, I’ll almost always opt for substance. But, like it or not—fair or unfair—a harsh reality of the Jungle is that perception can often carry the day. And up to this point in my career, it had done an excellent job of consistently separating me from my chips. The only practical solution was that I could no longer oper- ate as “only a broker.” I had to portray an image that would change the perception of principals in the deals I worked on. They would have to respect me enough to feel that I had a right to earn big commissions. It was a silly head game that I recognized I would have to learn to play if I intended to survive in the Jungle. I also recognized that it was necessary to possess a certain amount of real power if I didn’t want to come across as a Wizard of Oz clone. In other words, I didn’t want to rely solely on image without having something to back it up. Substance is important. And, based on my Cincinnati and St. Louis experiences, I recog- nized that one of the most substantive things I could do is have legal strength. I believed that if I had the proper legal tools on my side, it would give me the real power I needed. During my years at Screw U., I had become ever more careful about having all my t’s crossed and i’s dotted. I had learned, to my delight, that whenever I brought my attorney into a deal, the Uni- versal Attorney-to-Attorney Respect Rule came into play and gave me the power I needed to keep from being cannibalized. I reasoned that if both my legal power and image power were strong from the outset, they in turn would give me the posture to having staying power. The key to legal power was to use my own past disasters as a guide to developing the proper legal tools. I had flunked enough tests at Screw U. to be able to recognize that there were basically three critical legal tools at the disposal of any real estate agent who had the courage and determination to employ them. The first tool was now obvious to me—a real estate license in the state where the property was located. No matter how of- fended one may be at a state government’s standing in the way of

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 91

My Graduation from Screw U. 91

his selling real estate without its approval, the reality is that it happens to be the way the world works. So I accepted this reality and decided that I would have to be licensed in every state in which I wanted to sell property. It involved a considerable amount of time, energy, and investment, but I ultimately obtained real estate licenses in 11 states and the District of Columbia at a time when multi-state licensing in real estate was virtually un- heard of. The second legal tool was a signed commission agreement with the seller before beginning to work on his property. Experi- ence had taught me that it was nothing short of suicide to work on a deal on the basis of a verbal understanding. As a graduating senior at Screw U., I was truly amazed at how many real estate agents worked on the sale of large properties without having a written commission agreement with the seller. No matter how many times they are victimized, many real estate agents can’t seem to come to grips with the reality that it is normally not in the seller’s best interest to see them receive a big commission— or any commission at all! I had already become pretty successful at securing signed commission agreements from borrowers and sellers, but “pretty successful” would no longer be satisfactory. I vowed that in the future, no matter how good the deal or how big the potential commission, I would not expend an ounce of energy until the seller signed a commission agreement. The third legal tool was the use of certified mail. At Screw U. I had observed that whenever I used certified mail to submit a deal to a lender or buyer, then registered the name of the lender or buyer with the borrower or seller, the principals were far less likely to ignore me. As a result of using certified mail, they were aware that if a lawsuit were to develop over my commission, the introduction of dated and stamped certified slips and letters into court proceedings would be strong evidence of my degree of in- volvement. I had already been using certified mail in my dealings for quite some time, but now I would take a more serious and or-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 92

92 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

ganized approach to this important facet of my business. I laid out a system of certified-mail communication that was so intri- cate that I felt confident it would practically prove my case in court if I ever had to file suit to collect a commission. It’s important to point out, however, that while these legal tools could be very effective in cases where litigation became necessary, their primary purpose was to help me avoid lawsuits. It was my version of a Star Wars defense to shield my commis- sions: I wasn’t out to attack anyone; I just wanted to make it as difficult as possible for some lecherous principal to launch an in- tercontinental ballistic axe aimed at my fingers. With the techniques I describe in the next chapter, I would finally achieve the image power I had dreamed about for so long, and with the use of my three legal tools I would have the real power to back up my new image. But I wanted to take it one step further and back up my image power and legal power by being the best at my profession. In other words, I wanted to demonstrate performance power. There is nothing more powerful than having a reputation for getting results. The combination of image and substance is virtually unbeatable. Legal power is essential in the Jungle, but from a self-esteem standpoint, performance power is a real high. Nothing beats the feeling, in your heart of hearts, of knowing that you really do de- serve to be handsomely rewarded because you provided great value to the party you represented. I wanted to make it as diffi- cult as possible for a seller to pass the giggle test while claiming that I had not earned my commission. From now on, it was going to be obvious to both the buyer and seller that the initiation, progress, and conclusion of the sale were due primarily to the ef- forts of The Tortoise. The Theory of Intimidation and the Posture Theory put the finishing touches on the reality-based philosophy I had been de- veloping for years, both prior to and during my undergraduate days at Screw U. I now believed that I had the education and ex- perience to apply my philosophy not only to the earning and re-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 93

My Graduation from Screw U. 93

ceiving of large real estate commissions, but to every aspect of life. No question about it, majoring in Reality at Screw U. was the smartest thing I ever did. At long last, my philosophy was not only clearly developed, but organized in such a fashion that it was practical to use in my day-to-day dealings. It was no longer theory, but reality. I had succeeded in extracting the lessons learned from my painful experiences at Screw U. and converting them into a workable philosophy. All that remained was for me to customize my tech- niques to fit each new situation and thereby rearrange the divi- sion of chips in the deals on which I worked. You might say that it was my own version of a redistribution-of-the-wealth program. In the past, I had often been aware of the right thing to do, but had allowed my emotions to overrule my intellect. As part of my plan to change my image, I would now place great emphasis on being unwavering in my determination to follow my intellect and thus elevate my status in the Businessworld Jungle. I also recognized that once I proclaimed that I was above the pack—i.e., announced to the world that I had leapfrogged to a new level—I would be the target of ill will and, in some quarters, even outrage. Having developed a pretty good understanding of human nature at Screw U., there was little doubt in my mind that my audacious decision to leapfrog my peers in the real estate business was an almost certain invitation to jealousy, resent- ment, and scorn. How did I summon the courage to move forward in the face of such certain discomfort? Easy. I just kept thinking about the excruciating pain I had suffered on so many occasions at Screw U., and concluded that a little jealousy, resentment, and scorn was a small price to pay in return for dignity, peace of mind, and financial success. Being liked was not much of a reward for being poor and disrespected. By the same token, money and re- spect were more than enough consolation for having a pack of insecure neurotics dislike me. In the next five chapters, I discuss what I believe to be the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 94

94 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

five basic steps of selling. From the outset, I want to emphasize that these steps can be applied to virtually any aspect of life. It’s more than just a metaphor to say that we sell ourselves to the rest of the world every day of our lives. Whether or not you like it, you are a salesman, both in your business and personal life. The first four steps of selling are familiar to most people. Be- ing a successful salesman requires:

1. Having a product that other people value. 2. Locating a market (i.e., buyers) for your product. 3. Implementing a sales presentation and/or marketing strategy. 4. Closing the sale. These four steps have been discussed in many sales books, but, remarkably, I’ve never seen the fifth—and most important— step discussed in any book: 5. GETTING PAID!

The above two words are the only ones I have both capital- ized and underlined in this book, which should give you a pretty good idea of the degree of importance I place on getting paid. Throughout the book I have continually used the phrase earning and receiving. Why do I keep adding the words “and receiving?” Because, as everyone who has ever tried to sell anything has dis- covered, to his dismay, it’s one thing to earn a fee, but quite an- other to actually receive it. You make a grave mistake if you develop the habit of prematurely celebrating. Think of it as the Bottom-Line Theory, which states: You’re not through until you’ve crossed all the t’s, dotted all the i’s, and the check has cleared the bank. Everything else is fluff. In the remainder of this book, it will become obvious to you that the techniques I used to satisfy the first four selling steps were oriented toward successfully completing the fifth and most important step: getting paid. I again emphasize that the philosophy I used can be applied not only to any other kind of business, but to one’s personal life

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 95

My Graduation from Screw U. 95

as well. It’s just a matter of customization; reality applies to all areas of life. Regardless of what it is you’re trying to accomplish, always ask yourself: What actions must I take to achieve the bottom-line result? What must I do to bring about the payoff I’m after? It was a long and agonizing road I had traveled, a road lined with endless frustration, humiliation, and pain. But The Tortoise had responded by doing what he is programmed to do from birth—plodding and trudging forward in the hopes of somehow finding a way to cross the finish line before the hare awakens. Now, lo and behold, the time had come for The Tortoise to gradu- ate from Screw U. The moment had arrived for him to move deep into the foreboding interior of the Businessworld Jungle and begin playing the game for big chips. The $1 blackjack table no longer excited him. Swing open the doors to the baccarat room and make way for The Tortoise! (If you’re going to mix metaphors, you can’t do better than foreboding interior of the Businessworld Jungle and swing open the doors to the baccarat room. Hmmm.) I felt that if I was right about my philosophy, it should result in my earning, and receiving, substantial real estate commissions on a regular basis. As I stood at the gates of Screw U. for the last time, I looked back at my three professors who were observing my departure with varying degrees of curiosity. With arms spread and raised above my head, each hand displaying the traditional Nixonian victory sign, I smiled warmly and declared, “Let me make one thing perfectly clear: You won’t have The Tortoise to kick around anymore.” With that, I turned and made my final exit through the mag- nificent, blood-stained gates of Screw U., humming the school’s alma mater as I disappeared into the Businessworld Jungle in search of bigger game.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 96

“Let me make one thing perfectly clear: You won’t have The Tortoise to kick around anymore.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 97

Chapter 10

Using Posture Power to Get the Ball

hen it came to obtaining a product to sell, rule num- Wber one was to avoid working with other real estate agents—or, as they say in the trade, co-brokering. Ex- perience had taught me that the worst possible way to find deals was through others brokers and salesmen. Nonetheless, co-brokering seemed to be a way of life for most real estate agents. Rather than spending the time, energy, and money necessary to solicit listings directly from principals, they preferred to take the easy way out and work on deals passed along to them by their peers. One of the main problems with this modus operandi is that you’re too far removed from the person who is supposed to pay the commission, which in turn dramati- cally decreases your chances of getting paid. I felt that an agent 97 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 98

98 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

who operated in this manner was kidding himself by not con- fronting head on the Type Number Ones, Twos, and Threes who must ultimately be reckoned with in every sale if a commission is to be paid. I had known many real estate agents who spent day after day discussing multimillion-dollar deals with other agents, seem- ingly achieving fulfillment from their conversations alone. They steered clear of the excruciating effort it takes to secure a listing directly from a seller, let alone the time and energy it requires to locate a buyer for a property, implement a marketing method, and close the sale. Such an agent limits his efforts to sending out tenth- generation copies of scanty information about properties fur- nished him by other agents. It’s a lottery mentality—hoping upon hope that some agent with whom he is dealing will somehow get lucky and close a sale—and then, the ultimate hope, a small piece of the commission will miraculously filter its way down to him. I’m not saying that a real estate agent should never work with another broker or salesman under any circumstances. That would be ideal, but not practical. Circumstances regarding two of the sales I discuss later in this book were such that it made sense for me to pay a co-brokerage fee to another agent. Even in those instances, however, I took matters into my own hands and did everything possible to control the destiny of the sale. As a regular habit, though, co-brokering is the best way I know of to decrease one’s chances of receiving a commission, and for that reason it should be avoided whenever possible. In simple terms, the shortest distance between two points is a straight line, and when you co-broker a deal, you in effect form a triangle. The odds against closing a major deal are staggering even when you work directly with a principal. But to try to close a sale under the handicap of a third party standing between you and the person who has the power to say yes or no is a bit masochistic. My main interest was now in large apartment developments,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 99

Using Posture Power to Get the Ball 99

and the rule I laid down for myself was to not work on any project that was smaller than 100 units. As I progressed, I increased that minimum to 200 units, but was primarily interested in 300 units and up. When calling an owner cold, the first thing I wanted to find out was whether or not he had a genuine interest in selling his property. When I phoned for the first time, I made it a point to in- troduce myself to the owner’s secretary before she asked who I was, and then, in a matter-of-fact tone, I said that I wanted to speak to the owner about a “personal matter.” The object was to posture myself and make the secretary assume that I knew the owner personally by volunteering my name rather than waiting for her to ask. If the secretary still insisted on knowing the nature of my call, I came right out and told her that it regarded the purchase (not listing!) of one of her employer’s apartment developments. By wording it this way, I assumed that if the owner, after know- ing the nature of my call, did not come to the phone, or at least return my call, he wasn’t seriously interested in selling his property. If the owner did not return my call, or if he came to the phone and told me that he had no interest in selling, I would file his name and number in my tickler system for follow-up at a later date. I would then call him back in six months or so to see if cir- cumstances had changed and if he might then have an interest in selling his property. At Screw U. I had learned that most apart- ment developers have a building disorder—i.e., they are ready and willing, if not able, to build anything, anywhere, anytime—and the more they build, the more financial problems they have. The reason most builders frantically lunge from one project to another is to try to keep enough cash circulating (forget about profits) to pay for the last “I can finance out” deal—which, of course, ended up not financing out. A real estate developer with a true building disorder would not hesitate to construct a luxury high-rise in the Australian Outback if he could obtain financing

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 100

“What a location, mate. This project is a guaranteed winner.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 101

Using Posture Power to Get the Ball 101

for it. In case you’re a medical buff, it may interest you to know that in the psychiatric world the term building disorder is almost always used in conjunction with its sister term, pathological builder. But for our purposes here, let it suffice to say that crazy is crazy no matter how it is phrased. The owner I was searching for was the person who would come to the phone and give at least some indication that he might be interested in selling his property. I say indication, be- cause an owner will rarely come right out and admit that he’s in- terested in selling his property. Experience had taught me that even in cases where an owner was actively trying to sell his prop- erty, he would almost always act coy during my initial conversa- tion with him. I ultimately became savvy enough to recognize that when an owner said something like, “I’ve never really given it much thought,” he was, in fact, a serious seller. Builder-owners, bless their hearts, are a unique species. Not only do they not necessarily mean what they say, most of the time they don’t even mean what they think they mean. They live in an entirely different world from the rest of us—one that re- volves almost entirely around “the next deal”—and they speak a language all their own. By now, though, I had learned to translate “builderese” doublespeak into English pretty well. For example, “I’m always willing to listen” more often than not really meant, “I’m desperate. Make me an offer.” Once the owner displayed an interest in selling, the next step was to obtain some figures about his property so I could deter- mine whether or not the deal was makeable. However, I never asked the owner for this information during my initial conversa- tion with him, because I first wanted to establish my posture. Screw U. had taught me that one of the first things a seller does to ensconce himself as the intimidator is to make the real estate agent justify his existence. Once the seller blurted out something like, “Who are you?” my posture as El Schlepo Tortoise would be forever stamped on his forebrain. No matter how I responded to such an inquiry, I would come across as “just another real estate

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 102

102 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

agent,” and an owner needs another real estate agent about as much as he needs another vacant apartment. So my whole approach was geared to establishing image power in an effort to avoid having to justify my existence. As per the Leapfrog Theory, I not only had to be above being “just another real estate agent,” I had to be beyond even being asked who I was. I had to be so far removed from the rest of the pack that the owner would be too intimidated to dare to ask me such a question. I accomplished this by having a unique calling card de- signed. In addition to eliminating the question of who I was, my calling card made it almost impossible for an owner to forget me. That way, even if he wasn’t interested in selling his property right now, the chances were pretty good that he would contact The Tortoise down the road if his circumstances should change. My calling card was a spectacular, full-color, hardcover bro- chure costing nearly $5 a copy. The black cover had a high-gloss finish, and the brochure opened from bottom to top rather than the more traditional right-to-left format. Centered on the glossy, black front cover was a breathtaking, full-color photo of the earth as seen from the Apollo spaceship. Not only was my name not displayed on the front cover, it did not even appear on the inside of the front cover or first page. In fact, all that appeared on the inside front cover were the following words:

Earth To Life ...... Support To the Explorer ...... A Base To the Wise ...... An Investment

On the first page opposite the inside cover was a telescopic view looking down on metropolitan Chicago. By the time the brochure finally got around to mentioning my name on the fol-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 103

Using Posture Power to Get the Ball 103

lowing page, there was not much else that needed to be said. Obviously, anyone who used a spectacular $5 brochure as his calling card must be somebody. Obviously, anyone who didn’t feel it was necessary to even mention his name on the front cover or first two pages of his own brochure must be somebody. I was overwhelmed by my own modesty. The remainder of the brochure consisted primarily of brief statements alluding to my general expertise in the field of real es- tate. Primarily, though, it contained an abundance of dramatic pictures, logos, maps, and other carefully selected items that didn’t have any real meaning, but made it obvious who I was: Somebody! In short, the brochure was intimidating. It wasn’t that anyone understood what I did for a living after reading the brochure; they just knew that I wasn’t simply another member of the pack, not just another real estate agent. The bot- tom line was that I no longer had to justify my existence to an owner. Rarely did anyone ask me to explain anything more about my background after receiving the Earth brochure. Best of all, be- cause of its spectacular nature, the recipient of the brochure was unlikely to throw it away. It would have been like throwing away a beautifully illustrated hardcover book. Many people kept it right on their desks as a conversation piece, or, at the very least, somewhere close by where they could quickly pull it out and show it to visitors. This being the case, before the owner of a property could ask me any questions about my background when we first spoke over the phone, I took the initiative and suggested that I send him some information about myself. Not asking him for any of the details of his property immediately separated me from the rest of the pack, because it was the antithesis of how a real estate agent normally interacts with an owner. Instead of the agent’s usual stuttering and stammering in an effort to justify his existence to the principal, The Tortoise acted

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 104

104 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

cavalier about the whole thing. My tone implied that no one deal was that important to me. And when I took the initiative and suggested that it would be a good idea for the owner to learn something about me before proceeding further, the owner was al- most at a loss for words. Obviously, I wasn’t a real estate agent, because real estate agents simply didn’t talk this way. After mailing my brochure to the owner, I would wait a week or so before calling him again, and when I did call I was usually put right through to him. It was posture power in action! After the unusual nature of my initial telephone inquiry, followed by the arrival of my spectacular calling card, the casting of the roles in the saga was beginning to change. I was well on my way to be- coming the intimidator, while giving the owner a long-overdue, well-deserved opportunity to audition for the role of intimi- datee. Words can’t express just how happy I was for him to be able to experience the thrill playing such a foreign role. Now I was in an excellent position to further qualify the owner of the property by asking him to relate to me the most per- tinent facts over the phone. I developed a formula for calculating, in a matter of seconds, what a property might be worth to a so- phisticated buyer. If you want to work on large deals, regardless of the business you’re in, it’s critical that that you come to grips with the reality that the chances of any specific deal closing— even when the figures make sense—are very slim. (In this regard, never forget the importance of the Theory of Sustenance of a Positive Attitude through the Assumption of a Negative Result.) But if the mathematics of a deal are completely out of touch with reality, the odds of closing a deal begin to hover around zero. This being the case, I became ever more selective about the properties I worked on. The key was that I was not just interested in finding out whether or not the owner wanted to sell his property; it was just as important to find out if the property was saleable. It didn’t take a Ph.D. from Screw U. to recognize early on that time was the most valuable commodity I possessed. Think of it as the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 105

Using Posture Power to Get the Ball 105

Makeable-Deal Theory, which states: Concentrate your efforts on finding a few makeable deals rather than working on a large number of unmakeable deals and clinging to the desperate hope that one of them will miraculously close. Believing in the efficacy of this theory, I focused on effi- ciency. Specifically, I focused on finding that one good deal that had a serious chance of closing rather than working on 30 bad deals and clinging to the hope that luck and the law of averages would sooner or later combine to bring about a positive result. Forget luck. Stupidity not only has a way of stifling good luck, it can also skew the law of averages to the detriment of the stu- pid person. Nevertheless, salesmen and entrepreneurs in every industry seem to have a death wish when it comes to working on pie-in-the-sky deals that have virtually no chance of clos- ing. In real estate, I found that owners have an uncanny ability to keep real estate agents hooked on the fantasy that unmakeable deals can somehow be made. At Screw U. I finally recognized that the makability of a deal revolved primarily around cash flow (i.e., the cash that’s left over after deduction of all expenses and mortgage payments from gross receipts), also commonly referred to as “net spendable.” Anyone who has worked extensively with professional real estate buyers understands that cash flow is the name of the game. Contrary to popular belief, most professional buyers do not look at “tax loss” as a primary consideration when purchasing properties. Myths about the depreciation factor in real estate deals have been perpetuated over the years—primarily, I suspect, by property owners—but the truth of the matter is that most buy- ers look at tax benefits as a bonus. Cash flow has, is, and almost certainly always will be the most important factor when it comes to valuing income-producing properties—which is why they’re called income-producing in the first place. Accordingly, whenever an owner spent a great deal of time talking about the tax-shelter aspects of his property, I mentally rolled my eyes skyward, because I knew it was a sign that he

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 106

106 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

probably did not have a saleable piece of real estate. Sort of like criminal defense attorneys who, when short on facts, focus instead on fluff (aka “The O.J. Factor”). Experience had taught me that when an owner’s property demonstrated a healthy cash flow, he would be quick to emphasize that above all other factors. Another early giveaway to an unsaleable property was when an owner put a great deal of emphasis on how much it had cost him to develop the property or how well it was constructed, the two of which usually go hand in hand. The only time the quality of construction was important was when it was so shoddy that it might be viewed as a negative. Professional buyers give sellers very little, if any, credit for being dumb enough to overbuild. The hard reality is that the market value of a property, being pretty much based on cash flow, bears little relation to the owner’s cost of construction. Price and value are two entirely different issues. The seller will always take his cost of construction into account when com- ing up with an asking price, but the value the buyer places on the property is based primarily on cash flow. If an owner overspends on construction, that’s his problem, not the buyer’s. All this led me to the conclusion that the person who knew the least about a property’s market value was the owner. Never- theless, I still needed to get an indication of the owner’s asking price, even though I only considered it to be a starting point. I knew (though I never let on) that the price he initially quoted me would be much higher than the one he would ultimately be will- ing to accept. I don’t recall ever dealing with a serious seller who stuck to his original asking price to the bitter end. Even if a seller really believed that he wasn’t going to budge from his original asking price, he always ended up compromising once he smelled the un- mistakable aroma of chips on the table—especially if he had financial problems (which was almost always the case). Speaking of financial problems, that was another critical fac-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 107

Using Posture Power to Get the Ball 107

tor in my determination of whether or not a deal was makeable. Early in every negotiation I tried to assess the owner’s level of desperation, and that’s where my ability to translate builderese doublespeak into English came in very handy. The reality was that the more desperate the owner, the better my chances of con- cluding a sale. As a result of my new posture, desperation had be- come my best friend. Thus, if the owner’s asking price was at least within shouting distance of the ball-park price I had calcu- lated, and assuming there were no extraordinarily negative fac- tors involved, I would be prepared to move forward with trying to find a buyer. Unfortunately, a significant number of properties were not saleable at any price, because my calculations showed that most properties had little or no cash flow. In fact, in many instances the properties actually had negative cash flows. Nonetheless, I never met an owner who admitted that his property didn’t have a positive cash flow. The discrepancy between the owner’s math and reality was caused either by his unrealistic projections or by operating statements that conveniently failed to list all expenses—especially replacement costs. Owners are so unrealistic when it comes to vacancy factors, replacement costs, and other expense items that are not readily ascertainable that I pretty much considered their projections and operating statements to be useless. Instead, I relied on my own trusty calculator, and was able to quickly determine—while talk- ing to the owner on the phone—whether or not his property was saleable. (The lesson to be extracted and used in other areas of one’s life is that many people—probably most people—are gener- ally unrealistic about most things, particularly when touting their own deals, products, and prospects. Which is why you have to take most of what you hear with a grain of salt, take matters into your own hands, and do your homework.) If there was little or no cash flow—or, worse, a negative cash flow—or if the owner’s asking price was light years beyond the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 108

108 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

high end of my estimate of the property’s value, I bid him adieu and allowed him to go merrily on his way talking to other real es- tate agents about how marvelous his property’s construction was, how much the project had cost to build, or what a great tax-loss vehicle it provided. However, if the mathematics fell within my value parame- ters, I then told the owner that I would have to personally inspect his property “before making any commitments.” With this latter statement, I had managed, for the third time, to set the stage for recasting the roles of intimidator and intimidatee before the owner and I had even met. I could not possibly be a real estate agent, because there was no such thing as a real estate agent who was reluctant to make a commitment. Step one in this role-reversal game had been when I had initially called the owner and suggested that I send some in- formation about myself before discussing his property in detail. Step two had been when he received the Earth brochure from me. Now, in step three, I was telling him that I was going to board an airplane, at my own expense, and personally inspect his property—and that I could not “make a commitment” until I had completed my inspection. It would be unheard of for a lowly real estate agent to talk and act in such a manner. Clearly, I must be “somebody.” So when I reached the point not just of finding an owner who was interested in selling his property, but who had a saleable property, my next step was to haul my healthy posture onto a plane and visit the owner. I could then decide whether or not I would be willing to “make a commitment.” Of course, the real purpose of my trip was to obtain a signed commission agreement, but how many owners do you think would have been excited about my visiting them had I told them what my real objective was? Zero is a pretty good guess. To help me be vigilant about sticking to my vow to never again work on a deal without a signed commission agreement, I

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 109

Using Posture Power to Get the Ball 109

carried around a little card containing the words of a poem—a true literary masterpiece—I had composed:

With a written agreement, You have a prayer; With a verbal agreement, You have nothing but air.

It has been a source of lasting irritation to me that I was not nominated for a Nobel Prize in Literature for this gem—but, hey, you can’t have it all. Anyone can work on the sale of a property—the more the merrier as far as an owner is concerned, because it increases his chances of making a sale at or near his asking price—but to have a written authorization to do so, an authorization that clearly spells out the agent’s commission, is quite another matter. When I visited the owner’s city, the big moment had finally arrived—but with a new twist: It was the big moment for the owner, not me. After already having been intimidated no less than three times from long-distance range, he was about to meet a real, live tortoise—not just any old tortoise, but The Tortoise. In addition to the image I had taken such great pains to cultivate, I also found that people were more impressed with someone from a distant city than they were with an expert who might have been readily available to them in their own town. It seemed as though the greater the distance I traveled to visit an owner, the more of an expert I became. What a delightful delusion I had helped plant in the owner’s mind. Finally, he was going to be blessed with the opportunity to meet the expert from afar. When I arrived in the owner’s city, I brought with me the equivalent of a portable office, because I made it a point to as- sume the worst. I assumed, for example, that the owner did not own a decent calculator. I assumed that he used a manual type- writer from out of the fifties. I assumed that he didn’t have a func-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 110

110 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

tional copier. (We’re talking pre-Kinko’s here.) And, of course, I assumed that his secretary would become hostile if I pressed her to retype something. More often than not, most of my assump- tions proved to be pretty accurate. I not only brought my own calculators, typewriters, typing paper, and other supplies and equipment, I also traveled with at least one, and sometimes two or more, secretaries, depending upon the size of the deal. Picture the setting: Here was a real estate developer who had long delighted in such knee-slapping pastimes as pounding bam- boo shoots under real estate agents’ fingernails, throwing bones in the middle of a group of 10 or 12 starving co-brokers, and en- gaging in any number of other equally enjoyable kick-the-real- estate-agent torture games. Now, at long last, he sat in his office waiting for his first big meeting with the expert from afar. And rest assured that, after such a long wait, I certainly did not want to disappoint him. Nor did I. I marched into his office, impeccably dressed in my board-chairman’s uniform (black pin-stripe suite, white shirt, and black tie with the words “John D. Rockefeller” subliminally woven through it)—black briefcase in hand—followed by an en- tourage of anywhere from one to three assistants carrying calcu- lators, extension cords, mortgage-rate books, and a variety of other materials and equipment that might be needed. As you might have guessed, from that point on I was usually in complete control of the situation. While my main reason for bringing my traveling office with me was to make certain that nothing was left to chance, there was a bonus to my road show in that it ele- vated my posture yet another notch. What really carried the day for me was that I was actually able to pull it off without cracking a smile, notwithstanding the fact that I was usually chuckling inside. Once we got down to business, I played the noncommittal role to the hilt, having learned its intricacies from my Type Num- ber One professor at Screw U. I was in no hurry. I had to examine

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 111

“Greetings. I’ve come from afar to inspect your property.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 112

112 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

all the figures and look the development over carefully before I could give any indication of my interest or lack thereof. By this time, the owner was usually hyperventilating and salivating simultaneously—a deadly combination that has the potential to make pathological builders an extinct species. My property-inspection performance was carried out in con- vincing style. It consisted of strolling through the project and en- gaging in such stimulating activities as staring at bricks, gingerly tapping walls with my knuckles, and sticking my head down garbage disposals—all the while shaking my head from side to side to imply that I was very concerned about what I was finding. In other words, I played along with the illusion that these aspects of a property were important to experts. The reality, of course, is that the physical aspects of a property are, at best, of secondary importance to buyers (unless, as previously noted, the quality of construction is so poor that future replacement costs promise to be inordinately high). Again, the critical factor was cash flow, and I had already roughly calculated that—in a matter of seconds—in my office. Even if the development was built like Fort Knox, I knew it would have little or no affect on the cash-flow numbers. The only significance that exceptionally good construction or other secondary factors might have was that they might possibly nudge a prospective buyer a bit toward the high end of his valua- tion range, provided he was first interested on a cash-flow ba- sis. Nonetheless, I dutifully played out my inspector role, because I knew it was important to give the owner exactly what he was expecting. The last thing in the world I wanted was to be respon- sible for bursting his delusive little inspection bubble. Remem- ber, people have a right to delude themselves. After the inspection, I would sit down with the owner and review as many other largely irrelevant aspects of his property as he expressed a desire to discuss. Finally, when all the meaning- less factors had been reviewed to his satisfaction, I zeroed in on the only relevant factor: the numbers. This required me to

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 113

Using Posture Power to Get the Ball 113

play the role of a surgeon, but instead of asking my assistants for syringes, gauze, and scissors, I had them vigorously slap mort- gage-rate books, scratch pads, and pens into my hand on cue. Oc- casionally, out of the corner of my eye, I would catch a glimpse of the owner’s awed expression as I reached out my hand, without looking up, and shouted a command such as, “Red pen!” Voila! The red pen instantly appeared in my hand. It was almost as much fun as getting paid. (Well, not that much fun.) After intensely pounding away on my portable calculator and feverishly thumbing through rate tables, I would finally look up and utter hopeful words such as, “I might be able to do some- thing with this property at around ‘X’ dollars above the mort- gage.” I was careful never to say that I could sell the property. That would have been too direct. “Might be able to do some- thing” was much more mysterious, and kept the owner on the edge of his mental seat. While they mean essentially the same thing, phrasing, as I pointed out earlier, is of great psychological importance in all aspects of life. Saying that I could sell his prop- erty would have made me sound like just another real estate agent, but phrasing it the way I did allowed me to maintain my posture as the mysterious expert from afar. The first figure I threw out to the owner was, of course, al- ways at the low end of what I had calculated to be the broad market range, so I knew in advance that I would get a negative re- sponse. My motive, however, was to jolt the owner into coming down considerably from his original, and almost always unrealis- tic, asking price that he had quoted me over the phone. After the owner countered with a different, lower figure than his original one, I would then shake my head slowly from side to side, mumble some unintelligible words, open my rate books once again, and start punching away on my calculator. Many mum- bles later, I would look up and say something like, “Hmmm . . . Well, maybe I could stretch that to ‘Y’ dollars.” I jockeyed around like this with the owner until I felt I had gotten the price down as low as I could possibly hope to get it at that early stage of the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 114

114 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

game. My main objective was to get the owner into the water. Once that was accomplished, I felt confident that the natural flow of events would continually shave the price downward. I then whipped out my file of pretyped contracts (which I never referred to as contracts, for reasons you should by now understand) and said, in a matter-of-fact tone, something to the effect of, “I like to keep things simple, so I just use a one-page ‘un- derstanding’ to summarize the deals I’m involved in.” Here again it was a matter of word choice. Whether a document is called a contract or understanding has no legal significance whatsoever, but psychologically it can make all the difference in the world to the person sitting on the other side of the table. Contracts scare people; “understandings” sound innocuous, especially if their pur- ported purpose is only to “summarize the deal.” This was a deli- cate and critical moment. If I failed to get the owner to sign the understanding, I had wasted a lot of time, energy, and money. Up to that point, I had relied on my image power to support my posture. Now I needed real power in the form of a legally binding document in order to maintain my strong posture. I con- sidered this to be such a critical step that I took the trouble to develop, over a period of time, a complete series of “understand- ings” in an attempt to cover nearly every conceivable kind of situation. I did not use an attorney to help me construct these un- derstandings, for two reasons. First, I did not want my understandings to look too legal. Lengthy, complicated-looking documents—particularly ones con- taining a lot of legalese—tend to make people back away. If a document was too legal looking, the owner might want to bring in his attorney to review it. And once Legalman stepped into the picture, I knew from past experience that I may as well pack up my rate books, calculators, and secretaries, and return from whence I came. In fact, I went into every deal assuming that there was a deal- killing attorney waiting in the wings. While I knew that I would have to come face-to-face with Legalman if and when it came

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 115

Using Posture Power to Get the Ball 115

time for a closing to occur, there was no way that I wanted to go up against that master problem-finder before I even had a com- mission agreement signed. The second reason I wrote my own understandings was that I wanted to make them as practical as they were legal. Practical Law is not taught at Stanford, Harvard, or any of the other presti- gious law schools. It is offered only at Screw U. Having studied this all-important subject during my stay at that hallowed insti- tution of higher learning, I was well equipped to write practical, yet substantive, understandings. Virtually every sentence in my pretyped understandings was inserted specifically to avoid a replay of some previous nightmare I had experienced during my undergraduate days at Screw U. I ul- timately developed about 20 understandings, but it never ceased to amaze me how those Type Number Ones, Twos, and Threes al- ways managed to come up with a new maneuver to try to sepa- rate me from my chips. And every time they did, I added yet another clause or two to my understandings in order to prepare for the next time I might be confronted with the same maneuver. Because of the brevity and lack of legal terminology in my understandings, plus the fact that I had firmly established myself as someone of importance, I was usually able to get the owner to sign on the dotted line without his summoning Legalman. It was critical to get the agreement signed quickly during that first meeting while my posture was at its peak. In this regard, two items were of particular importance. First, I extracted as much information as possible from the owner over the phone so the blanks in the agreement—with the exception of the asking price—were pretty much filled in prior to my arriving at the owner’s office. Second, in the event some changes did have to be made in the agreement, they could be made quickly and easily because of my modus operandi of traveling with a fully equipped office. I developed these two techniques specifically to avoid the possibility of having to fumble around at the moment of truth. I

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 116

116 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

was cognizant of the fact that there was a point in time when the iron was as hot as it was going to get, and that it was critical to strike—i.e., to get the agreement signed—before things cooled down. If the seller signed my understanding (read, commission agreement), I looked at it as the equivalent of a touchback in foot- ball; i.e., I was starting out first-and-ten on my own 20-yard line, with 80 percent of the field still standing between me and the goal line.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 117

Chapter 11

Advancing the Ball to Midfield

inding a market for the properties I had under contract was Fthe least difficult of the five selling steps, because it’s to a buyer’s advantage to look at as many deals as possible. And since a buyer normally has no financial obligation to an agent, he welcomes any and all submissions. He has everything to gain and nothing to lose by looking. The catch is that most buyers are not really buyers at all. I wasted an enormous amount of time, effort, and money before I finally realized that most people who claim to be real estate buyers seldom, if ever, actually buy anything. Just as sellers are continually able to lure real estate agents into working on unmakeable deals, so too are agents lured into wasting a great

117 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 118

118 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

deal of time and effort talking to wannabe buyers who never buy anything. I cannot imagine a more sadistic set of circumstances than a well-meaning but naive real estate agent trying to sell an un- makeable deal to a non-serious buyer. Any agent who allows himself to get into such a situation ends up feeling like a ping- pong ball, with the would-be seller and non-serious buyer being the paddles. How do you spot a non-serious buyer? First, you have to understand that even though an individual or company is listed in one or more directories as a buyer does not mean that he’s a se- rious buyer. Second, no matter how big a real estate company may be, it doesn’t necessarily mean that it is actively involved in the purchase of properties. In fact, I found that the vast majority of public companies listed in real estate directories are focused on specialty fields such as hotels or nursing homes, building their own properties, or making interim mortgage loans. Even those who really are interested in purchasing properties are often “out of the market” at any given time. (That is to say, they are not currently purchasing properties because they either don’t have enough cash available or are concentrating their ef- forts on problems with existing properties.) So even though the names of prospective real estate buyers are readily available to any real estate agent, it’s wise to invest the time and effort neces- sary to qualify such buyers before sending them submissions. Over a period of time, I became adept at spotting non-serious buyers, because they all tend to talk and behave in the same man- ner. For example, if you ask a non-serious buyer about his guide- lines for purchasing properties, he will most likely tell you that he doesn’t have any guidelines and that he’s “willing to look at any- thing.” But the fact is that most serious buyers do have definite guidelines, because they know exactly what they’re looking for. Another tip-off to a non-serious buyer is that he tends to dwell on questions of secondary importance, such as those per- taining to location, construction, and/or age of the property. As I

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 119

Advancing the Ball to Midfield 119

previously pointed out, such questions are reasonable and nor- mal, but not until the buyer is first satisfied with the numbers and has decided that he has a definite interest in purchasing the property. If the numbers don’t add up, it simply doesn’t matter where the property is located, how well it’s built, or how old it is. Serious, sophisticated buyers get down to the nuts and bolts right away, because they understand the mathematical guidelines for evaluating cash flow—again, the key factor when it comes to evaluating income-producing properties. In addition to having everything to gain and nothing to lose by looking at as many deals as possible, a non-serious buyer figures that there’s always a chance that he might run across a “steal”—a deal where the numbers are too good to be true. I should say, however, that if I had ever been lucky enough to work on a so-called steal (which, by the way, I wasn’t—nor am I certain that such an animal really exists), I certainly would not have needed to call upon a non-serious buyer. I had plenty of serious buyers who would have been delighted to gobble up such a deal. In order to locate serious buyers, I used a technique similar to the one I used for finding makeable deals. My initial objec- tives were to learn what type of properties a buyer was interested in and what his general guidelines were for analyzing such properties. It was much easier to get buyers to come to the phone than it was to get through to owners, because, as noted, it’s in the buyer’s best interest to work with as many real estate agents as pos- sible. Also, since the buyer normally has no commission obliga- tion to the agent, he can take an ostrich attitude toward the subject of the agent’s commission. Buyers usually find it all too convenient to hide their heads in the sand when the seller starts to cut off the agent’s fingers at the closing. The buyer’s boilerplate excuse when the finger-cutting ceremony begins is: “The com- mission is between you (the agent) and the seller. I don’t want to get involved.” The compassion is enough to bring tears to one’s eyes.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 120

120 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

It would be appropriate to describe the buyer’s attitude as premeditated apathy, a phenomenon you can observe all around you in just about every walk of life. If something doesn’t directly affect their own well-being, most people—particularly when it comes to money—are quick to use the excuse, “I don’t want to get involved.” Real-life stories of people ignoring the cries of someone being murdered are well known. True, few real estate agents are murdered at closings, but commission muggings cer- tainly are common. My initial purpose in calling a buyer was to find out what his guidelines were so I would not waste a lot of time sending him in- formation about properties that did not meet his criteria. This was a problem, however, because even though a buyer was more than happy to receive submissions, I knew that he would not be receptive to answering questions for a real estate agent over the phone. So, just as I had done with property owners, I took the ini- tiative and suggested that I first send the buyer some information about myself and my operation. Into the mail went my attention- getting $5 Earth brochure, again followed by a telephone call a week later. As with sellers, the reaction among buyers was that The Tortoise must be “somebody.” When I called the buyer the second time, I was not “just another real estate agent”; I was the mysterious expert from afar who used a spectacular hardcover brochure as his calling card. During the second call, I explained that since we were both (meaning the buyer and me) busy people, I thought it would save a lot of time if he could answer a few quick questions over the phone. That way, I explained, I could avoid sending him proper- ties that did not fall within his guidelines. Already possessing a strong posture because of the image I had created from the outset, I was usually able to gain the buyer’s cooperation with respect to my request. For purposes of recording the information, I developed what I referred to as a “Buyer Infor- mation Form,” which, when properly filled out, allowed me to

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 121

Advancing the Ball to Midfield 121

make a quick determination as to whether or not a property fit a buyer’s guidelines. The first question on the form was unusual, to say the least. It asked whether the buyer was a principal or broker. The reality was that not only were most of the entities who were listed as buyers in real estate directories not serious or currently active buyers, many of them were really just brokers posing as buyers. Who needs another broker? The difference between their modus operandi and mine was that I was actually doing the dirty work necessary not only to locate sellers, get them under contract, and close deals, while these pretenders were doing nothing more than acting as passive middlemen. As an example, a large construction company might have been listed as a real estate buyer even though it had never pur- chased a property. The president of that company, however, might just happen to be a licensed real estate broker who took other agents’ deals (submitted to him because of his company’s misleading classification as a buyer) and resubmitted them to le- gitimate buyers in the hopes of sharing commissions. Very cute. Why would the big-shot head of a substantial real estate firm be interested in earning a real estate commission when he seem- ingly has bigger fish to fry? I found that a common, naive trait among real estate agents was their failure to understand that no matter how wealthy a principal may be, he is never above raking a few more chips off the table for himself. One of the reasons that the rich get richer is because of the very fact that they are always interested in acquiring more chips! In The Art of the Deal, Don- ald Trump said (in alluding to what he believed to be a $10,000 overcharge by a subcontractor) that if the time ever came when he was no longer willing to give his attention to a $10,000 item, he’d quit the business. Because of the shock value of my unusual first question, I found that the “buyer” would normally, in a reflexive manner, tell me the truth—or, at the very least, stutter around enough to

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 122

122 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

make it obvious to me that he was, in fact, primarily interested in acting as a broker. And once I became convinced that he was just a broker fronting as a buyer, I immediately eliminated him from my list of prospective buyers. If, however, the buyer managed to get by that all-important first question, I would then breeze through the rest of the form in a minute or two. The more deals I submitted to a buyer, and the more I questioned him about the deals that were not of interest to him, the more specific the information I was able to add to his form. Most important, after a reasonable period of time I was able to tell whether he was really a serious buyer or just a curiosity seeker. Curiosity seekers infiltrate every business and every walk of life, and, for the sake of efficiency, it’s important to learn to weed them out as quickly as possible. To do that, you have to be- come adept at recognizing their wide variety of intimidating pitches and disguises. Why would someone choose to be a curiosity seeker? Who knows? Maybe he’s bored. Or insane. Or maybe it’s just human nature. Whatever the reason, I strongly suggest that you not waste time trying to figure it out. Instead, learn to write off curiosity seekers as just another one of those great mysteries of life. Ultimately, I put together a small but valuable hard-core group of serious buyers with whom I developed excellent per- sonal relationships. It is somewhat of a paradox that even though an agent, in most cases, technically works for the seller, it is the buyer with whom he has an ongoing relationship. Was it really in the best interest of each of my buyers to see me get paid? After all, in theory a buyer can purchase a property for a lower price if the seller does not have to pay a commis- sion. Notwithstanding, since the relationship between an agent and buyer has the potential of being long term, and since a seri- ous buyer wants to look at as many deals as possible, it actually is in his best interest for a productive agent to receive his full com- mission at every closing.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 123

Advancing the Ball to Midfield 123

When it comes to a buyer’s determining how valuable a con- tinuing relationship with an agent is, the deciding factor is how well the agent does his job. That’s why I considered it to be so im- portant to have a strong posture in the eyes of the buyer as well as the seller. My objective was to have each buyer consider me to be such a valuable resource that he would be motivated not to resort to premeditated apathy when it came time for my commission to be paid. The ideal, of course, would be for him to insist upon my being paid as a condition of the closing. Unfortunately, I never quite achieved that status with most of my buyers, although the majority of them did give me their moral support (which was nice, but, to my dismay, my office land- lord refused to accept moral support as payment for my monthly rent). Even moral support was valuable, however, because an agent who has both the buyer and seller plotting against him may as well avoid the (i.e., his own) and not even bother to show up at the closing. In other words, better moral support than outright apathy. Before going on to the third step of selling, I would like to give you an example of what can happen to an agent when he does not have the support of the buyer. It was a situation in which I had all the legal tools on my side—a real estate license in the state where the property was located, a signed commission agreement with the owner, and heaps of certified mail—yet still managed to lose my chips. The buyer (“Charlie Cheet”) was primarily a developer of large apartment projects, but he had recently put out the word that he was interested in purchasing existing apartment develop- ments. Because I viewed Charlie as an exceptional prospect, I paid a personal visit to him at his office in Florida for the purpose of finding out what his guidelines were. A short time after returning from Florida, I sent Charlie, by certified mail, a presentation on a group of apartment properties in Houston, the asking price for which was $10 million. Then, a curious thing happened. From out of the blue, I received a call

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 124

124 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

from a total stranger (“Larry Lyar”) who told me that he was “associated with” Charlie Cheet. I was not yet sophisticated enough to understand that vague expressions such as “associated with” are almost always an early warning sign that a commission heist is on the horizon. Larry emphasized that he did not work for Charlie as an employee, but as an independent “associate” (an- other red-flag word that often translates into “unemployed flake”) who had the responsibility of reviewing deals for him. He said that in return Charlie gave him a participation in any properties acquired through him. Perhaps by this time I was a bit overconfident and didn’t real- ize that no matter how much experience you may have, there’s always another vile creature lurking in the depths of the Jungle who is capable of coming up with yet another new gimmick. There is, however, a common thread that runs through every new gimmick, no matter how clever or different it may be: It is always designed to separate you from your chips. As always, I did a first-class job in gathering all the data on the properties and putting together a professional presentation. However, I did not present the information to Charlie Cheet, the apartment-builder-turned-buyer, but to his “associate,” Larry Lyar. (This now-puzzling decision gave me the distinction of demon- strating that I could do a perfect imitation of Homer Simpson years before he was invented.) I even went to the expense of flying Larry to Houston to inspect the properties, and spent a great deal of time wining and dining him. Following our trip, every time I asked Larry what the status of the deal was, he assured me that he and Charlie Cheet were “working on the numbers” and would soon give me an answer. This went on for months, until I finally assumed that Charlie Cheet was not a serious buyer. That mistake led to the Assumption Theory, which states: Assume nothing! I woke up one day to find that my assumption had been en-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 125

Advancing the Ball to Midfield 125

tirely wrong. Charlie not only was a serious buyer, he had already closed the Houston deal without my knowledge! Larry Lyar, of course, was nothing more than a blue-suede-shoe broker who got a commission out of the deal without even having to split it with the scaly guy who had presented it to him and who had done all the work. Shame on me. I was a foolish-looking reptile who had gotten caught in a classic sting. As you might have guessed, I’m not real close with Charlie Cheet and Larry Lyar anymore. Why did I not sue Charlie Cheet when I had all three legal tools in my possession? Because by this time I had a pretty good understanding of practical law (as opposed to theoretical law). Consider the following:

1. Both Charlie Cheet and the seller claimed that they had been talking to each other about the properties before I had regis- tered Charlie with the seller. (At no time during our negotia- tions had either of them even hinted at such a thing, let alone made an issue of it. By contrast, my treacherous Type Number Two professor in the Missouri Massacre had at least had the decency to let me know early on that, notwithstanding the in- disputable facts, he intended to stick it to me and not give me credit for the buyer I had brought to him.) So not only was the buyer not giving me his moral support, he was actually siding with the seller. Any time that the buyer and seller are willing to lie in concert, it’s time to fold ‘em—extract the lesson learned and go take a disinfectant bubble bath.

2. Charlie Cheet refused to accept any responsibility for Larry Lyar’s actions, insisting that he had never authorized Larry to say that he was his associate or in any way represented him. Though Charlie sugar-coated his words, his position, plain and simple, was that it was my tough luck if I had been taken in by a master serial liar. (Is it starting to sound familiar to some memorable experience out of your own past?)

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 126

126 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

3. Larry Lyar, upstanding young lad that he was, in turn insisted that I had somehow misunderstood him and that he had never told me that he was associated with the buyer. In Jungle terms, this one fell into a category known as “The Big Lie.” No matter how sophisticated or experienced you may be, it’s im- possible to be fully prepared to cope with a Jungle creature who is willing to take it to the limit and resort to The Big Lie. Regardless of what legal tools you may have on your side, never forget Businessworld Jungle Rule No. 1: If you insist on sleeping with big dogs, you’re guaranteed to end up with big fleas. The fleas I got from Larry were big enough to pick up my wallet and throw it down a sewer.

4. Even though it was obvious to me that this Jungle trio (i.e., in- cluding the seller) had succeeded in putting me through the wringer, I was realistic enough to know that there was enough confusion surrounding the facts (such as the involvement of Charlie’s Cheet’s “associate,” Larry Lyar, and Charlie’s will- ingness to side with the seller) to give some smart litigation at- torney sufficient ammunition to cloud the issue for a judge or jury.

5. Our court system is an important weapon that Jungle crea- tures use to offset Tortoise-like legal tools. Because of the time involved in bringing a case such as this to trial, the guy in the wrong almost always has the advantage. After some cursory investigation, I concluded that it would take anywhere from three to five years for the matter to be resolved in court, and in the meantime I would not only have to come up with bushels of cash to pay onerous legal fees and court costs, I also would have to invest considerable time and energy and be further ag- gravated in the process.

6. There was a strong rumor that the seller of the properties might have to declare bankruptcy (apparently the proceeds of

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 127

Advancing the Ball to Midfield 127

the sale were not enough to bail him out of his troubles), and, after investigating the rumor, I concluded that his imminent financial demise was a definite possibility. This being the case, I recognized that even if I won in court, it could prove to be a chipless victory.

When I weighed all the facts, it simply did not add up to a smart gamble of my time, energy, and money to pursue the mat- ter. I had already learned that the Jungle has its own set of rules for meting out justice—something about survival of the fittest, or some such thing. Plain and simple, if you lose your case in the Jungle, you lose your case—period. My lesson in the Houston deal again confirmed that even though the buyer does not normally pay the salesman’s commis- sion, it was important to develop good relationships with my buyers. Had the buyer of the Houston deal been on my side, it could have made a major difference in the outcome. Notwithstanding the Houston fiasco, once I had obtained a product to sell and had at least one serious buyer whose Buyer In- formation Form indicated that he was a good prospect for the kind of property I was offering, I considered myself to have ac- complished sales step number two: locating a market for my product. In playing-field terms, I had advanced the ball to perhaps midfield—which meant I still had a long way to go to reach the end zone.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 128

Chapter 12

Reaching the Opponent’s 20-Yard Line

gain, it was of prime importance to me to perform at a Ahigh level, not only because it gave me credibility with both buyers and sellers, but should I ever have to take legal action to collect a commission, I felt my performance would be a major factor in my favor. I worked out a system for gathering property information and preparing presentations that not only was detailed, but unique in concept. My information-gathering system made it possible for a person with very little real estate knowledge to obtain the pertinent facts. Just as I had managed, through experi- ence, to develop commission agreements that became increas- ingly sophisticated, I likewise developed a series of “Property Data Forms” to fit every conceivable type of situation. 128 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 129

Reaching the Opponent’s 20-Yard Line 129

I taught several of my secretaries how to use these forms quickly and efficiently, which made it possible for me to make my exit after obtaining a signed commission agreement from the property owner. Leaving one of my secretaries behind to gather the property information was a big step forward, because it freed me to work on other deals. To an extent, then, I guess you could say that I was successful in cloning myself. After my secretary had gathered all the information, she would return to my office and submit her completed form to an- other person who would then use her material to prepare a profes- sional presentation of the property. When the presentation was completed, I would review my Buyer Information Forms (dis- cussed in the previous chapter) and decide who the best prospects were for that particular property. I would then implement my third legal tool: certified mail. Certified mail was a potential savior, because in the event I should have to take legal action to collect a commission, certified-mail slips could be the deciding factor. It was a good example of recog- nizing and acknowledging reality—the reality that I might have to take legal action to collect a commission, no matter how hard I might try to avoid becoming embroiled in a lawsuit. Again, my approach was to hope for the best but assume the worst (suste- nance of a positive attitude through the assumption of a negative result). If I never needed to use the certified-mail slips, all the bet- ter, but a certified-mail slip is like a gun: When you need it, you need it bad and you need it fast. Hence, I made it an ironclad rule to send every presentation by certified mail to all legitimate prospects. You may think that I was a bit paranoid, but future events proved that no matter to what extremes I went to protect myself in the Jungle, I was, in fact, almost always underprotected. About a week after I sent a presentation by certified mail, I would call the prospective buyer to see if he had an interest in further discussing the property. If he was not interested, I would try to find out precisely why, then note the reasons on his Buyer

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 130

130 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

Information Form. But if he indicated that he did have an interest in the property, I would immediately register his name with the owner via my new best friend—certified mail. My next objective was to get the prospective buyer to meet with the seller and inspect his property. To bring this about, I fo- cused on getting as much relevant information as possible flow- ing back and forth between the buyer and seller. Given that my primary objective was to make certain that I received my full commission if the deal were to close, a steady flow of informa- tion moving between buyer and seller was of no small impor- tance. Why? Because, among other things, it would be clear evidence to all concerned that I was the major force not only in bringing the buyer and seller together, but in getting the deal closed. Regardless of what business you’re in, when it comes to sales or deal-making, it’s critical that you to build a clear record of your involvement—not just to use as a last resort in court, but as a constant reminder to all the principals involved that you are/ were instrumental in making the deal happen. Because of my strong posture, I was normally able to keep the lines of communication flowing through me rather than around me—a psychological must when it comes to maintaining one’s posture. Long-distance telephone calls were also important, because they became a matter of record and, if necessary, could help to substantiate the degree of my involvement in a deal. Never forget that your phone bill is a permanent, irrefutable record that has the power to destroy that most devastating of all Jungle weapons—The Big Lie. If a buyer told me that he would like to speak directly with the seller, or vice versa, I handled it smoothly. Rather than dis- playing nervousness over such a request, which would have de- noted weakness, without hesitation I indicated that I thought it was an excellent idea (even though I really thought it was a hor- rible idea). However, I subtly maintained control of the situation

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 131

Reaching the Opponent’s 20-Yard Line 131

by telling (rather than asking) the buyer or seller, whichever the case may have been, that I would set up a conference call among the three of us. The key here was that I neither hesitated nor asked anyone’s permission. Rather, I responded immediately and stated, with confidence and authority, precisely how the request would be handled. As a bonus, being bold and taking the initia- tive added to my already strong posture. I knew all too well that if I allowed the buyer and seller to talk to each other without my being on the phone, I would be ask- ing for my first posture puncture. Posture maintenance is a deli- cate matter. No matter how slight that first puncture may be, it’s malignant in nature. For this reason, I always tactfully and subtly tried to block any direct conversation between buyer and seller, because I knew that private communication between two carni- vores could be the first step toward eliminating my anticipated payday. There was only one thing more dangerous than the buyer and seller talking to each other over the telephone, and that was (Gasp!) their meeting face-to-face without my being present. Of course, I didn’t need to worry about that possibility until I had the buyer interested enough in the property to be willing to spend the time and money to travel to the seller’s city. My feeling about getting the buyer to inspect the property was very much like that of a life insurance salesman who feels that he’s three-quarters of the way toward making a sale if he can just persuade the prospective client to take a physical examina- tion. If a buyer was motivated enough to fly to a distant city to meet the seller and inspect his property, I then metaphorically thought of myself as being in scoring position. Obviously, no sale was going to take place until the buyer made such a trip. Sure, he could determine his initial interest based on a handful of figures he had received up to that point, but there was no way that he was going to get serious about a purchase until he had personally met the seller and stared at a few bricks.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 132

132 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

In this regard, I did two things to expedite the prospective buyer’s decision to get on an airplane. First, I spoon-fed him any and all information he requested. It was important to take matters into my own hands and remove as much responsibility as possible from everyone else. If, for example, there were legal questions about the mortgage, instead of spending several days trying to track down the seller’s attorney, then waiting several more days for him to get back to me with an answer, I would un- dertake to research the needed information myself. I actually trained one of my secretaries to read mortgages, mortgage notes, deeds of trust, mortgage-commitment letters, and most other documents involved in real estate closings. She got so good at it that she often was able to obtain the answer to a buyer’s legal question in 15 minutes or so, which made it possible to avoid waiting a week or two to get the answer from some lazy, negligent, fee-building attorney. Of course, some lawyers might protest that she was violating the government-enforced legal mo- nopoly laws regarding the practice of law, but from my stand- point she was merely saving everyone time and money by finding the information the buyer had requested. And, to boot, she wasn’t arrogant about it, she returned phone calls promptly, she con- veyed the information in an intelligible manner, and she didn’t bill at the rate of $200 an hour. Nirvana for an entrepreneur. Similarly, if an accounting question came up, I found that by taking matters into my own hands by having one of my people work on it, I could usually come up with the answer in a matter of minutes, whereas it might have taken a week or two to track down the seller’s accountant to obtain an answer. The second thing I did in an effort to hasten the buyer’s deci- sion to visit the owner’s property was to continually impress upon him my belief that all his questions could be answered quickly if he would meet with the seller and personally inspect his property. Each time I obtained another answer for him, I reemphasized the point that a trip was sure to save him a lot of time in the long run. If the buyer was really serious, my gentle,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 133

Reaching the Opponent’s 20-Yard Line 133

repeated suggestion would usually result in a commitment to make the trip. Experience had taught me that it was critical to get the buyer to personally inspect the property at the earliest possible date, be- cause time is always against the person who is trying hardest to get the deal closed. That’s because time brings into play the Fid- dle Theory, which states: The longer you fiddle around with a deal, the greater the odds that it will never close. Nero fiddled while Rome burned, and too many salesmen and entrepreneurs do likewise as they watch their deals go up in smoke. This reality is as true in a love relationship or any other aspect of life as it is in a business deal. Never forget that time is your enemy when it comes to closing deals. Why? Because cir- cumstances constantly change. In a real estate deal, for example, the mortgage lender may suddenly decide that it wants an unrea- sonable fee in exchange for allowing the property to be trans- ferred to another owner, the seller’s wife may talk him out of going through with the sale, or the buyer may close another deal and decide that he doesn’t want to make any more purchases for awhile. The only thing that I could be certain would never change was my desire to collect a commission, so I had a big incentive to keep pushing everything forward as quickly as possible. Conse- quently, I tried to undertake as much responsibility as I could, and not rely on the seller’s motivation to sell or the buyer’s moti- vation to buy. The only motivation I could count on to remain constant was my motivation to collect a commission. The Fiddle Theory and the Tortoise and Hare Theory fit to- gether like the proverbial hand and glove. As The Tortoise, I had always trudged ahead relentlessly, hoping that the other guy would momentarily relax. By not fiddling around, I always fig- ured that I might get there a week, a day, an hour, or even a minute earlier, which experience had taught me could mean the difference between making or losing a sale. Speaking of ex- periences, the one I had in Tampa years earlier—showing up at

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 134

134 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

the bank first thing in the morning and collecting my $15,000 commission in cash—was always in the forefront of my mind to keep me focused on the importance of the Fiddle Theory. By assuming as much responsibility as possible for answer- ing questions and gathering information, and by continually sug- gesting to the buyer that he could probably have all his questions answered at one time if he would personally visit the owner, I often was able to speed up the buyer’s decision to inspect the property. This was of great importance, because once he made the decision to invest in a trip, I knew I was getting close to scoring territory. Whenever possible, I would make arrangements to travel to the buyer’s city ahead of time so he and I could “review the details of the deal on the plane” on the way to seller’s city. In reality, of course, I had ulterior motives for making such an out- of-the-way trip. First, I wanted to make certain that the buyer and seller did not meet before I arrived. Second, it gave me the oppor- tunity to develop a more personal relationship with the buyer and hopefully inspire in him a sense of loyalty to me. At best, I was hoping to make my relationship with the buyer so solid that he would refuse to go through with a closing if the seller started to reach for my chips. At a minimum, I wanted to nurture our relationship to the point where the buyer would at least feel uncomfortable being a party to a closing in which a game of pin-the-tail-on-the-tortoise was an entertaining side attraction. If I was unable to accompany the prospective buyer on his flight to the city where the property was located, I did the next best thing: I met his plane at the gate when it landed. One way or another, I wanted to make certain that I was always positioned between the buyer and seller, which is why I took the initiative in all aspects of the negotiations. In previous years, my knowledge had usually been more than sufficient, but because of my weak posture, it hadn’t resulted in big paydays. Now my posture was strong, because I possessed

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 135

Reaching the Opponent’s 20-Yard Line 135

both image power and legal power. My objective at these buyer- seller meetings was to display so much knowledge about the property and the closing of the deal that even the seller would be embarrassed to challenge my right to a commission. (If you’re chuckling and shaking your head from side to side over that last comment, you’re starting to get it, because my objective proved to be nothing more than naive and wishful thinking. Sellers always challenge agents’ commissions.) From start to finish I did everything within my power to see to it that the buyer and seller were never together without my be- ing present. You might say that The Tortoise portrayed Mary’s Little Lamb––everywhere the buyer went, I was sure to go. When all the buyer’s questions had been answered and a deal had been structured, I personally accompanied him to his departure gate at the airport. I never left town first, even if it meant missing my last flight out and having to stay overnight. Not until the buyer’s plane had pulled safely away from the gate did I shed my lambskin and revert back to being a tortoise. If everything went as planned, and the buyer and seller ver- bally committed to moving forward with a deal, I had success- fully accomplished sales step number three: implementation of a marketing strategy. At that point I considered myself to be in scoring position—at about the opponent’s 20-yard line. I knew I was getting close, because I could see the blood of intimidatees who had dared to try to score in previous games. As most everyone knows, however, moving the ball those last 20 yards is a real gut check. It’s where the defense gets nasty and the play gets ugly. No doubt about it, a tortoise has to be pre- pared to leave it all on the field in order to cross the goal line.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 136

“I could swear you look different than when I saw you in New York, but I can’t seem to put my finger on what it is.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 137

Chapter 13

Scoring

nvariably, shortly after the buyer and seller arrived at a gen- Ieral agreement on the terms of a sale, a strange thing would occur: Would-be purchasers suddenly started beating a path to the seller’s door. It was like magic. For months, even years, the seller had not been able to find a serious buyer for his property prior to my entering the picture. Then, suddenly, it seemed as though people were standing in line to buy his project after we had already verbally agreed to the terms of a deal. This phenomenon occurred with such regularity that I even- tually came to count on its happening in every deal. In fact, once I recognized it as a predictable pattern, I figured out a way to use it to my benefit. I took on the aura of a clairvoyant by assuring the seller, well in advance, that once I found a serious buyer for him, 137 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 138

138 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

“wannabe buyers” would start banging on his door. I cautioned the seller not to take such belated offers seriously, because if these soon-to-appear “buyers” had a legitimate interest in his property, they would have made offers a long time ago. Conse- quently, when phantom offers began to make their predictable appearance, it served only to add to my already strong posture, be- cause it reaffirmed in the buyer’s mind that I knew whereof I spoke. It’s important to analyze what caused this sudden barrage of phony offers to appear each time I was about to close a sale, be- cause, again, the psychology behind it affects every area of one’s life. It’s a phenomenon that can be explained by the Boy-Girl Theory, which states: Everyone wants what he can’t have, and does not want what he can have. It doesn’t get any more basic than this. The Boy-Girl Theory is one of the most ingrained of all instincts governing human relationships. It must surely have been in effect the day intel- ligent man first appeared on earth. There are very few adults, if any, who have not played the boy-girl game in high school, col- lege, or beyond. In high school, the easiest way for a guy to land a girl (or vice versa) is to “play it cool.” In contrast, he can virtually assure that he won’t land the object of his affection if he salivates on his shirt every time she walks by. Unfortunately, this syndrome doesn’t stop in high school or college; it stops when life ends on Planet Earth. When you see a guy who looks like a compressed version of Frankenstein’s Mon- ster walking down the street with a gorgeous woman on his arm, you can’t help but wonder what she could possibly see in him. What you are probably witnessing is the result of the Boy- Girl Theory—physical shortcomings notwithstanding, the mini- monster probably just knows how to play it cool. Women love men who play hard to get; men love women who play hard to get. And we accuse animals of acting only on instinct. Beware: The same psychology applies in business. No matter how successful a person may be, human nature is such that he is

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 139

“Oooh, Frankie, you’re such a brute.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 140

140 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

inclined to want the deal he can’t have and not want the deal he can have. Because of this reality, the nearer one of my deals got to a closing—i.e., much like the gal who’s about to get married, it would soon become unavailable—the more other buyers, both se- rious and non-serious, imagined that they wanted to buy the property. The apartment development that had been on the mar- ket for months or years was about to become a bride. An agreed- upon selling price is about as cool as a property can play it. In most cases, of course, this sudden surge of offers amounted to nothing more than a panic reaction on the part of fellow real estate agents and buyers. Since other agents had absolutely noth- ing to lose by inundating an owner with verbal offers, I could usu- ally count on a herd of these characters crawling out from under their rocks as a closing began to look more like a probability than a possibility. It cost them absolutely nothing to make verbal of- fers that sounded more attractive than mine, but coming up with cash was quite another matter. Once the Boy-Girl Theory took effect, invariably it would lead to a corollary problem: Not only did other buyers suddenly start imagining that they wanted the property, but often the seller would begin thinking that he did not want my buyer’s offer, because it was a deal that was now in hand. Psychologically speaking, once he had a written offer, it became the woman who was too available. This second phenomenon can be explained by the Better- Deal Theory, which states: Before an individual closes a “deal,” it’s human nature for him to worry that there may be a better deal down the road. It’s a theory that holds true regardless of whether the deal in- volves real estate, insurance, vacuum sweepers, the acquisition of a hundred-million-dollar company—or a marriage partner. It’s an almost uncontrollable urge for a person to wonder, at the last moment, if he might not be missing out on a better deal some- where down the road. Because of this instinct, the seller’s mind was all too open to

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 141

Scoring 141

the last-minute verbal offers that were sure to be directed at him. He was ripe for these buyers on white horses who came prancing in at the eleventh hour, because the thought had already crossed his mind that if he closed my deal, he might miss out on an opportunity for a better price on his property just around the next bend. So when real estate agents came scurrying to him with offers from mysterious clients at the last moment, he wanted to believe that their offers were real. Greed is a great catalyst for al- lowing one’s wishes to override reality. As a result, the seller would be much more inclined to take seriously an offer that, un- der normal circumstances, he probably would have quickly dis- missed as having no substance. To combat the negative effects of the Boy-Girl Theory and the Better Deal Theory, my objective was to do everything within my power to bring the deal as quickly as possible to the point where the money was on the table and the papers were ready to be signed. Then it was put-up-or-shut-up time—time for the army of mysterious buyers to put up their money or crawl back under their rocks. I’m happy to report that rarely did they do any putting up, and usually it was just a matter of time until the seller would begin to question whether there really was a better deal down the road. Once my buyer’s chips were on the table, the Boy-Girl Theory would begin to have a reverse effect in my favor, because a serious buyer does not leave his cash lying around forever. The more a seller hesitated, the more likely the buyer would begin to show signs of having second thoughts himself about the clos- ing. And when that happened, it tended to cause the seller to bet- ter appreciate the bird in the hand—the deal he might lose if he didn’t get on the stick and get it closed. The fact that the babblers in the bleachers (read, real estate agents and would-be buyers) hated to see the property being taken out of circulation didn’t matter to the seller once he realized that they were unable or un- willing to come up with cash when my buyer’s chips were already on the table.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 142

142 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

To bring the deal to the put-up-or-shut-up stage as quickly as possible, I always tried to analyze what the real objectives of the buyer and seller were, as well as what their key objections were. I say analyze rather than find out, because it has been my experi- ence that parties to a deal very often are not consciously aware of what their real objectives and objections are. Also, because of a variety of ulterior motives—or out of pure embarrassment— either the buyer or seller, or both, might purposely suppress their true objectives and/or objections. Two objectives of which I could always be certain, however, were that the buyer wanted to buy the property for the lowest possible price and the seller wanted to sell the property for the highest possible price—the epitome of a conflict of interest. This is precisely what selling is all about. If there were no basic con- flict of interest between the buyer’s and seller’s objectives, there would be no need for an agent. The better an agent is at being able to resolve this inherent conflict between buyer and seller, the better his chances of earning (though not necessarily receiving) his commission. If I was able to correctly analyze and satisfy the basic objec- tives and objections of the buyer and seller—especially the basic conflict over price—I then focused on the shortest route to a clos- ing: Taking it upon myself to assume as much responsibility as possible. The Fiddle Theory was always foremost in my mind, be- cause once the buyer and seller spelled out the terms of a deal, I knew that time was of the essence. An extra week, an extra day, or even an extra hour might mean the difference between making or blowing the sale. Just as I had done in implementing my techniques for find- ing deals, I tried not to depend upon the performance of any of the other parties. From the moment the buyer and seller ver- bally agreed to the terms of a sale, my entire office staff was avail- able 24 hours a day. There was no way that I was going to allow my commission to be tied to the abilities and/or motiva- tion of the buyer or seller to get things done, nor to the incompe-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 143

Scoring 143

tence, apathy, and/or negligence of their secretaries, attorneys, or accountants. I recognized early on that documents were a key element in getting a deal closed. I considered some documents to be so im- portant that, if a big enough commission was at stake, I would have one of my secretaries personally fly to a city to pick them up from one of the parties, then fly to another city to hand-deliver them to the appropriate party. Once I was inside the 20-yard line, the stakes were big enough and the odds in favor of a closing high enough to make it worthwhile to risk significant time and capital in an effort to ward off unnecessary delays. My techniques often astonished the employees of both the buyer and seller. Life, for them, was quite simple. If someone re- quested some information from them, they gathered it at their leisure, put it in an envelope, applied a first-class postage stamp, and dropped it in a mail box at the end of the day. To pick up the telephone and call the information in to the party requesting it, which might save three or four days, was unthinkable. And to board an airplane and hand-carry a document to someone was to- tal insanity. Only a tortoise would be crazy enough to do such a thing—and I often did. (Little did I know that a gentleman by the name of Fred Smith was about to descend upon the Milky Way Galaxy with a long-overdue service called Federal Express, which would alleviate the need to resort to such rash action.) Plain and simple, if you aspire to a high success rate when it comes to getting results, you must shake the habit of assuming that someone—particularly someone whom you do not know very well—will see to it that important details are taken care of. Instead, get in the habit of taking matters into your own hands and moving swiftly once the goal line is in sight. Think of your- self as a great quarterback: When the game gets down to those final minutes, take control! If all went well, I succeeded in advancing the ball to the one- yard line, the point at which the chips were on the table and the documents ready to be signed. But that last yard is almost always

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 144

144 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

the most brutal. My education at Screw U. had taught me that when I arrived in town for the long-awaited closing, there were still two potential obstacles that could keep me from scoring. The first and most awesome obstacle was the Attorney Goal Line Defense. No NFL team can match the Attorney Goal Line Defense in intensity. Simply put, there is no way that any attor- ney worth his salt is going to just sit back and allow a deal to close without at least putting up a fight. There we were—the buyer, the seller, and me—sitting in a room together, chips on the table, the deal ready to close. Pre- dictably, at that point, who should appear on the scene? Not Su- perman . . . not Plasticman . . . not Cookieman. Lo and behold, it was none other than—alert the media—Legalman! Onto the field he would trot, flapping his Brooks Brothers cape in the wind and cackling as he opened his briefcase full of little deal-killing good- ies. “Would this be an easy one to kill?” he wondered to himself. Would he be able to destroy this deal without working up a sweat, or would this be one of those rare but difficult challenges for him? Legalman would immediately begin to implement the “he- we-I” evolution strategy. At the outset, he would talk in terms of he (the seller) in discussing the property and the closing. Then, in a relatively short period of time, the word he would subtly evolve into we (i.e., the seller and Legalman). At that point, the seller was no longer in full control of his destiny. Nay, it was now he and Legalman who were making the decisions. Finally—you guessed it—Legalman, in a galling display of doublespeak, would magically transform we into I (as in Legalman). Some things in life are inevitable, and Legalman’s “he-we-I” evolution strategy is one of those inevitabilities. From that point on, it was entirely Legalman’s deal. The buyer and seller had been reduced to bother- some but necessary bystanders to Legalman’s closing. Now, if the buyer and seller were nothing more than ne- cessary but bothersome bystanders in the eyes of Legalman, can you imagine how he viewed The Tortoise? He might have con- sidered me to be bothersome, but he certainly could see no reason

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 145

“I haven’t given up a score in the last eight deals, and I don’t intend to start now.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 146

146 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

why I was necessary. As a result, when Legalman made his ini- tial entrance into the deal, he was usually taken aback by my strong posture. After all, wasn’t I “just a real estate broker?” What was I even doing at the closing, anyway? How dare I not be intimidated? In order to understand how incredible such a situation was for Legalman to digest, you have to appreciate the fact that there are many natural predators in the Jungle, creatures whose sur- vival depends upon the killing of their prey. One of those preda- tors is Legalman, and he preys upon deals. (I’m not sure whether that makes him a carnivore or vegetarian.) The fact is that Legal- man’s financial survival depends upon his ability to kill deals, and the creatures who spawn those deals are more often than not salesmen, businessmen, and entrepreneurs. Where Legalman is concerned, we’re talking about a literal life-or-death matter here. After all, if every deal closed smoothly, he could become an en- dangered species. Talk about a conflict of interest. My singular focus was to get the ball over the goal line, while Legalman’s training had specifi- cally prepared him to keep green upstarts like me from moving the ball that last yard. Anyone who cannot fully grasp the reality that the primary function of Legalman is to kill deals would be wise not to step foot in the Jungle. Honesty compels me to add that I do not blame Legalman for his deal-killing ways, given that his law-school training specifi- cally prepared him for the life of a predator. A Phi Beta Kappa friend of mind once told me that during his three years of law school, the emphasis was almost entirely on how to find prob- lems. He said he could not remember a single course that was fo- cused on how to solve problems. With that kind of training, why shouldn’t we expect Legalman to be a deal assassin? Bringing him into a deal is like throwing him a piece of raw meat. (Hmmm . . . maybe he is a carnivore.) I knew that Legalman would expect me to come crashing through the middle of the line to try to pick up that last yard,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 147

Scoring 147

and that he would set his defenses accordingly. So, to cross him up, I would usually try to finesse my way over the goal line. With a well-executed end sweep, or perhaps a screen pass to the outside, I might just be able to make that last yard un- touched. Straight up the middle looked far too treacherous to attempt. In other words, I never tried to push Legalman or get tough with him. The big fella with the cape is hard to intimidate, be- cause his law-school training continually reinforced in his brain the notion that no one merits a higher station in life than lawyers. By the same token, I realized that it would be a fatal mis- take for me to cower. If there was one thing I had to give Legal- man credit for, it was his killer instinct. I knew that once he sensed weakness on my part, he would ride roughshod over me. If I adopted the “Yes, Your Highness” attitude that so many of my comrades in the pack had been intimidated into accepting when dealing with attorneys, I knew that Legalman would knock the ball from my grasp and most likely recover the fumble. I therefore displayed a calm, matter-of-fact attitude. When I spoke, it was with an air that implied that I had no concerns about anything, and that a closing was a foregone conclusion. Problems did not represent obstacles to a closing, but normal “points” that had to be “handled” as a natural part of every deal. Such an attitude was confusing to Legalman, because he ex- pected me to display the typical real estate agent’s panic mode. By acting unconcerned about each deal-killing goody that he pulled from his bag, I was able to throw Legalman off balance and thereby weaken his defenses. He was totally unprepared to deal with someone who seemed to not even acknowledge his deal- killing treachery. As Legalman injected one problem after another into the deal, I would say things like, “That’s a very good point (not prob- lem). I’m glad you brought it up.” I would then proceed to state (not ask) a number of ways that we (not just Legalman) would (not could) handle (not solve) that particular point (again, not

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 148

148 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

problem). But never did I directly challenge Legalman. My atti- tude was that it was assumed by everyone involved that there was going to be a closing, and that the only purpose of our all being present was to work together to “handle” the normal “points” that are inherent in every closing. Just business as usual. Legalman had never been up against a tortoise before. Old standby “problems” such as needing some obscure document from the mortgage lender—problems that Legalman had always counted on to stall a closing for at least a week or two in order to give the Fiddle Theory time to take effect—were dissolved before his very eyes. I accomplished this by merely dispatching one of my secretaries cross country to pick up the document in question and hand-carry it to the party who requested it. After handling some of Legalman’s best shots in this manner, he might, if I were lucky, begin to tire and conclude that the long lunches, golf games, and martini hours he was missing by trying to keep this strange reptile from traveling one lousy yard were not worth the effort. Hopefully, then, he would ease up just enough to allow me to nudge the nose of the ball over the goal line. In other words, it was a war of attrition. However, in the event Legalman held his ground, I imple- mented the Boy-Girl Theory as a last resort. In the most casual manner, I would say something to the effect of, “Well, I guess that’s it. It looks as though we just won’t be able to close this one.” When it got to that point, it was time for the seller to fold his hand or become a big boy. Meaning it was time for him to reas- sume control of his deal, time to stand up and let it be known that he was once again calling the shots. Unfortunately, not many sellers have the nerve to take such bold action. About the only thing that seemed to work was to raise the seller’s fear of losing the deal that was on the table. So if there was no other way to handle Legalman’s Goal-Line De- fense, there was still hope if I could instill fear in the seller’s heart that he was about to lose the deal. With the psychology of the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 149

Scoring 149

Boy-Girl Theory thrashing about in his nimble brain, he might just be willing to commit heresy and find the nerve to stand up to Legalman. Before leaving the subject of the Attorney Goal Line De- fense, I should point out that there is one factor that is even more important than all the techniques I have already described for overcoming Legalman’s bag of little deal-killing goodies. The fac- tor I am referring to is financial desperation on the part of the seller. Unfortunately, a real estate agent has no direct control over this factor, but the more desperate the seller, the better the chances that he will not allow Legalman to sabotage the closing. Even though an agent has no direct control over this factor, he does, of course, have indirect control by virtue of his having the power to choose which deals he works on. Which gets back to the strategy of working hard to find makeable deals rather than working on a lot of unmakeable deals in the hopes that one will accidentally close. In reality, the degree of financial despera- tion on the part of the seller is the single most important factor in determining how makeable a deal is. The more financial prob- lems the seller has, the more success you’ll have in keeping Legalman off the playing field. In summation, it’s important to grasp the reality that Legal- man has been, is, and always will be a major obstacle—and, more often than not, the major obstacle—to closing deals. Since the general population will never understand that an attorney is no- thing more than a college graduate with a special piece of paper on his wall that grants him a monopolistic right to practice in- timidation on civilians, you are at a decided advantage if you do possess such an understanding. Further, it is essential for you to develop techniques for protecting your deals from the clutches of this deal-thirsty predator if you aspire to a high degree of success in the Jungle. Surprisingly, the buyer’s attorney (as opposed to the seller’s attorney) seldom caused me problems, because his client was in the business of buying properties. If the buyer was a serious pro-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 150

150 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

fessional whose main line of business was the purchase of in- come-producing properties, his attorney knew all too well that it was in his best interest to leave his bag of deal-killing goodies at home and do everything possible to help his client close sales. The other obstacle that usually confronted me at the one- yard line was the seller’s dirty laundry, which could include any one of a number of surprises. Some of the more common of these surprises were undisclosed, major liens against the property (even though the seller had repeatedly assured the buyer that none ex- isted), the mortgage holder’s refusal to allow the property to be transferred from the seller to the buyer (even though the seller had assured the buyer that the mortgagee had already given ap- proval for the transfer), and many more vacancies than the seller’s official “rent roll” had indicated. (To this day, a favorite trick of sellers is to fill vacant apartments with relatives, friends, and em- ployees until after a closing takes place.) Sooner or later, a real estate agent needs to come to grips with the reality that no matter how many times the seller assures him that all the information he has submitted is correct—that there are no hidden surprises—there will be several major, undis- closed items of a deal-killing magnitude that surface as a sale nears the closing stage. I always tried to soften the blow of the inevitable dirty laun- dry by preparing the buyer for it ahead of time. Just as I fore- warned the seller that there would be a sudden surge of phony offers once he had a verbal agreement with my buyer, so too did I warn the buyer that he could count on many negative surprises as we neared a closing. This not only helped to mentally prepare the buyer for the seller’s inevitable dirty laundry, but again made me appear to be very savvy when the inevitable problems arose. Of course, I used the same kind of semantics I did when turn- ing Legalman’s problems into normal “points” that had to be “handled” as a part of every closing. I created an atmosphere of expectancy rather than surprise with regard to the inevitable ap-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 151

Scoring 151

pearance of the seller’s dirty laundry. In addition, I found that most sophisticated buyers had enough experience to realize that a seller’s closing surprises are simply part of the game. My objec- tive was to just try to eliminate as much of the shock value of the dirty laundry as possible. If the problems could be resolved by sending someone to an- other city to pick up a document or administer some persuasion, I again took matters into my own hands and did what had to be done. However, if the problem could not be resolved by physical means, there was always the hope that I could persuade the seller to lower his selling price enough to adjust for the dirty laundry that appeared on the scene at the last moment. If that didn’t work, I tried to see if either a sale-leaseback or contingent-payment sale could satisfy both sides. All else failing, my last resort was to again fall back on the psychology of the Boy- Girl Theory. I would talk to the buyer in private and remind him of all the reasons why it was a good deal, hoping to create a sense of fear over the possibility that he might lose the “girl.” Of course, if the dirty laundry was too outrageous—as was often the case—at some point I had to be willing to walk away from the deal. As I pointed out in the Theory of Sustenance of a Positive Attitude through the Assumption of a Negative Result, there are often factors that are beyond one’s control. As a result, no matter how well I managed to finesse my way past Legal- man, the seller’s dirty laundry would often stop me before I crossed the goal line. But even if I managed to get past both Legalman and the seller’s dirty laundry, I still had to complete the fifth and final selling step of selling: getting paid. After all the time, energy, and money I had spent in obtain- ing the product, locating a buyer, implementing a marketing method, and closing the sale, it was all for naught if I didn’t get credit for the score. If I was careless enough to commit an infrac- tion on the touchdown play, all the effort I had expended to move

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:44 PM Page 152

152 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

the ball downfield was meaningless, because closing a deal and not getting paid is analogous to scoring the winning touchdown and having it called back because of a penalty. Above all, then, I had to become an expert at avoiding a “penalty” once I got into scoring position, and I realized that my ability to do so very much depended upon my ability to defend myself against the intimidators who were ready to pounce on me the moment I tried to touch the ball.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 153

Chapter 14

It Doesn’t Count Until the Points Are on the Scoreboard

n successfully accomplishing the first four steps of selling, Imost of my efforts were directly or indirectly geared toward succeeding at the fifth and most important step: getting paid. Contrary to what most people naively assume, the object of the game is not to close deals. The object is to walk away with chips in your hand. In real estate brokerage, selling a property is only a means to an end, that end being the pocketing of a commission by the real estate agent. As I have repeatedly stated, there’s a big dif- ference between earning a commission and receiving a commis- sion. When I closed a sale, I was fully aware that I had only earned—not received—a commission. And to make certain that I

153 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 154

154 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

never lost sight of what my real objective was, I carried a second card in my wallet that contained yet another literary master- piece, to wit:

Closing deals is so much trash, If you, my friend, don’t get no cash.

Again, no Nobel Prize. Maybe some day. In some of the most trendy success and how-to books, there is usually a great deal of emphasis placed on doing what’s in the client’s best interest, and I totally concur with the idea of going the extra mile for one’s client. Above all, I believe in the concept of value-for-value. Nonetheless, it’s curious to me that no book ever seems to address what’s in the best interest of the salesman, broker, finder, or other person who puts the deal together—in real estate or any other field. Above all, I have never seen anything written in any success or sales book about how to accomplish the most important step of selling: getting paid. At Screw U. I had come to the conclusion that the emphasis of most salesmen, entrepreneurs, and deal-makers is misdirected. It is, indeed, noble to have the client’s best interest at heart, but your wife and kids might feel just a bit more secure if you also had your (and their) best interest at heart as well. I never walked away from a closing without feeling that I had performed a valu- able service for my client, so I had no trouble sleeping at night on that score. What was a problem, however, was that the principals in most of my deals seemed to consider me to be out of line if I in any way suggested that I wanted to make certain I got paid. In case you hadn’t noticed, there’s not a whole lot of altruism in the Jungle. There is no conflict of interest in doing what you agreed to do for someone and getting paid for doing it. In selling real estate, I found that the only conflict is the one created in the seller’s mind when it suddenly occurs to him that if he doesn’t pay the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 155

It Doesn’t Count Until the Points Are on the Scoreboard 155

real estate agent the agreed-upon commission, it will mean more chips in his pocket. All I did was put a stop to allowing the seller to intimidate me into thinking that my only concern should be his welfare, and that being concerned about my own needs was in some way unethical. Such thinking is sheer, intimidating rubbish. If you’re over 21, you are certainly aware that one of the most commonly used intimidation ploys is to make a person feel guilty for not properly concerning himself with the other per- son’s welfare; i.e., concentrating too much on his own well-be- ing. We hear this kind of gibberish from shameless politicians all the time. During election campaigns, they love to rail on end- lessly about the disparity between “the rich” and “the poor.” Welcome to the world: Of course there’s a disparity between peo- ple at the top of the financial ladder and those at the bottom. There’s supposed to be! That’s what freedom and free markets are all about. To paraphrase Will Durant, freedom and equality are sworn and everlasting enemies. Nonetheless, political rabble- rousers have been winning the minds of the masses through class-warfare intimidation since the days of the Greek and Ro- man Empires. Remember, the Theory of Intimidation states that the re- sults a person obtains are inversely proportionate to the degree to which he is intimidated. By developing techniques to dramati- cally improve my posture, I positioned myself for accomplishing my ultimate objective—getting paid. In the final analysis, what I really did was separate myself from the rest of the pack by learn- ing how to cope with intimidating people and thereby increasing my chances of receiving what I earned. Specifically, as a closing drew near, I took three important steps to maintain my strong posture:

1. I kept my finger on the pulse of the deal 24 hours a day so I could pinpoint the time and place of the closing.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 156

156 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

2. I continued to nurture my relationship with the buyer in the hopes that, at a minimum, I would have his moral support.

3. I showed up at the closing with my attorney, and counted on the Universal Attorney-to-Attorney Respect Rule as my insur- ance policy if all else failed.

If, despite my strong posture and all the precautions I had taken, the seller still tried to cut off my fingers when I reached for my chips, I dispensed with the niceties and drew my mental saber from its sheath. At that point, tactfulness was set aside, and it was showdown time. Regardless of whether the seller was trying to steal part or all of my commission, I was militant when it came to protecting my chips. My attitude was unyielding, solidly backed by the wisdom of the Bluff Theory, which states: The secret to bluffing is to not bluff. In other words, never lay down an ultimatum unless you’re prepared to follow through with it. Wealthy people, as you have undoubtedly observed, tend to be excellent bluffers. My Type Num- ber One professor at Screw U. had taught me the importance of financial staying power. He was always prepared to walk away from a deal, because there was no one deal that was life or death to him. If borrowers thought he was bluffing, they did so at their own peril. He wasn’t. When he threatened to walk away from a deal, he meant it. He was always the intimidator, and the prospective borrower either willingly accepted the role of intimi- datee or he didn’t get the loan. Role assignments were not subject to negotiation with my professor. If the secret to not bluffing was to have staying power, and if wealth was the backbone of such power, I recognized that I would have to find a substitute for wealth—at least until I reached a point where I, too, possessed significant financial resources. Com- mon sense told me that the only logical substitute was determi- nation. The nice thing about determination is that it’s just as

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 157

It Doesn’t Count Until the Points Are on the Scoreboard 157

available to you and me as it is to Bill Gates. I simply drew an imaginary line in my gray matter and said to myself, “This is where intimidation stops. Beyond this line, all bluffs get called.” With determination as my substitute for wealth, if the seller started to reach for my chips, I moved swiftly in an effort to throw a monkey wrench into the closing. It was critical not to get lulled into fiddling while the horse was making a dash for the barn door. If I allowed a closing to occur without getting paid, the problem of securing my chips would become infinitely greater. If the seller did manage to make it through the closing with- out paying my commission, and if he continued to refuse to pay me within a short period of time thereafter, I then had no choice but to resort to the one thing I specifically had been trying to avoid from the day I first talked to the seller: legal action. Unfor- tunately, because of the way the legal system works in the U.S., even the winner of a lawsuit usually ends up losing. Legalman’s fee-building techniques virtually guarantee this. But if that was the only course of action left to me, I did not hesitate to take it. I wasn’t bluffing. Thankfully, more often than not things went as planned, and I didn’t have to resort to legal action. It was a great feeling to be able to trot into the end zone untouched, and exhilarating to look back over my shoulder and see that no penalty flags had been dropped. Then, and only then, could I delight in watching the points go up on the scoreboard. At that point—and only at that point—I had completed the final and most important step of selling: getting paid. When the game was over, I was not always the most popular guy at the clos- ing, but I had long ago decided that I would rather have the seller taking my name in vain as I walked away with my chips than have him talking about what a nice guy I was as I walked away without my fingers. In the final chapters of this book, I relate blow-by-blow de-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 158

158 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

scriptions of the deals I closed during the first complete year in which I put my reality-based philosophy and techniques into ac- tion. These deals resulted in my receiving $849,901 in real estate commissions, yet I was the same tortoise who had barked for a $1,250 bone just a couple years before—with one exception: My shell was now protected by an intimidation-shield coating of the highest quality.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 159

Chapter 15

The Return of The Tortoise

he last time I had ventured into the state of Missouri— Talmost two years earlier in St. Louis—I returned home de- moralized and defeated. I had dared to step out of line and challenge the precedent that it was okay for principals to inflict cruel and unusual punishment on real estate agents. I had scored a touchdown and audaciously suggested that the points be put on the scoreboard. I had been the bad little tortoise who had tried to reach in the cookie jar and ended up getting spanked, the wise- guy real estate agent who had the gall to expect to be paid his full commission just because he had been successful in selling the owner’s property at a price that was acceptable to him. It was in St. Louis where I had presumptuously reached for my chips and,

159 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 160

160 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

as punishment for my crime, had had my entire hand cut off by a white-hat seller. It was my devastating experience in St. Louis, more than any other, that had prompted me to vow to find a way to strengthen my posture. I had promised myself that I would leapfrog to a new level and that I would find a way to make certain that in the fu- ture I would actually receive what I earned. It was only fitting, then, that less than two years after the low point of my career at Screw U. I should return to the state of Missouri to work on the biggest deal of my life. It was also a poetic coincidence that my second Missouri deal happened to approximate the size of my ear- lier St. Louis sale. I first made contact with the three partners (the “Booze Broth- ers,” so called for their unwavering commitment to make hard liquor an integral part of every meeting—morning, noon, and night) who owned the Kansas City properties shortly after mak- ing the decision to work full time on large, income-producing real estate. (It is noteworthy to point out that had it not been for the Leapfrog Theory, I never would have pursued the Kan- sas City deal, because I still would have been focused on second- mortgage loans.) After a couple weeks of analysis and numerous telephone conversations with the Booze Brothers, I decided that the deal looked makeable enough to warrant my investing some serious time and money. It goes without saying that I cautioned the Booze Brothers over the phone that I personally would have to inspect the properties before I could “make a commitment.” The best writer in Hollywood could not have put together a more dramatic script. How different it was from my previous ex- perience in Missouri only a short time before. In the St. Louis deal, I had been assured by my Type Number Two professor that his integrity was beyond reproach and that I had no need for a signed commission agreement. His self-righteousness had totally intimidated me. But when I arrived in Kansas City, my posture was very different. I was the expert from afar, and, as such, was almost immune to intimidating tactics.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 161

The Return of The Tortoise 161

The fact that the eight properties were spread throughout a number of small towns (in both Missouri and Kansas) close to Kan- sas City made my inspection task unusually difficult. Luckily, the owners felt that there was nothing too good for the expert from afar, so they rented a small, private plane for the inspection tour. This made it possible for me to complete my inspection of all eight apartment developments within 24 hours after my ar- rival. When I finished this meaningless, exhausting tour, there was only one thing I knew for certain: I never again wanted to see a garbage disposal, air-conditioning unit, or cheap wall-to- wall carpeting. Then came the big moment—not for me, but the owners. I did some incoherent mumbling, punched a few buttons on my calculator, then played out a dramatic pause that would have made Marlon Brando envious. The owners were in luck. The ex- pert from afar had been satisfied with the inspection, and his cal- culations had come up positive. While cautioning the Booze Brothers not to become overly optimistic, The Tortoise merci- fully let them know that he thought he might be able to “do something” with their properties. There is no greater feeling of brotherhood than giving hope to a threesome of alcoholics. By sheer coincidence, I happened to have eight pretyped “un- derstandings” with me—one for each property—which I matter of factly pulled from my briefcase at just the right moment. I em- phasized that the understandings could, of course, be terminated unilaterally at any time, and that they did not preclude the own- ers from working with other agents regarding the sale of their properties. Before you could say, “Pardon me, did you say you were a broker?” the understandings were signed and the expert from afar had disappeared across the wheat fields of Missouri. Just who was that scaly green stranger, anyway? Was he for real, or had the owners just been dreaming that an expert from afar had descended upon them? Would he ever return? Not to worry. The Tortoise’s return trips were to be numer- ous. But first there was an important item that had to be taken

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 162

162 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

care of. While I had obtained one of my three essential legal tools— signed commission agreements for each of the properties—I did not have a real estate license in either Kansas or Missouri. Shortly before I first contacted the Booze Brothers, however, I had inquired about becoming a licensed real estate broker in both states. I had already begun working my way through the massive red tape that had to be dealt with in order to be scheduled to take both real es- tate broker’s examinations, but at the time I signed the Kansas City agreements I had not yet taken the test in either state. Once the eight commission agreements were signed, how- ever, it became a top priority to do whatever was necessary to ob- tain the appropriate licenses. The hard lesson I had previously learned in the Missouri Massacre was still fresh in my mind: A seller is not legally obligated to pay a real estate commission to anyone who is not licensed in the state where the property is lo- cated. I had long ago resigned myself to the realities of the gov- ernment protection racket (i.e., “licensing”), and accepted the fact that the only way to deal with it was to comply. Accordingly, in the weeks following my initial visit to Kan- sas City, while working to find prospective buyers for the proper- ties, I also made time to travel to Jefferson City, Missouri, and Topeka, Kansas, to take the real estate examinations for Missouri and Kansas. Luckily, I passed both tests, and shortly afterward re- ceived my real estate brokerage license in both states. I then pos- sessed two of the three legal tools necessary to give real power to my posture, a far cry from the Missouri Massacre in which I had possessed none of the necessary legal tools. The Kansas City deal was a milestone in my career in that it was the first time I had specifically geared all my efforts toward making certain that I got paid if a sale was finalized. Telling friends and acquaintances that I had closed another multimillion- dollar deal no longer titillated me. To my chagrin, I found that my grocer and landlord dealt only in cash, not closings. So this time around in Missouri, my main emphasis was on making certain that I walked away with my chips.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 163

The Return of The Tortoise 163

After my first trip to Kansas City, I worked nonstop putting together a detailed, accurate presentation of the Booze Brothers’ eight properties, then sent it (by certified mail, of course) to a number of qualified buyers. It was about a month later that I reg- istered (also by certified mail) with the Booze Brothers a real es- tate investment trust that had showed a great deal of interest in their properties. After a number of telephone conversations with the presi- dent of the real estate investment trust (“Ernest Ego”) and the Booze Brothers, Ernest indicated that he was prepared to travel to Kansas City to inspect the properties and meet with the own- ers. Another inspection—ugh! More garbage disposals, more air- conditioning units, more bricks to stare at. Everyone pretended as though they were intensely interested in every aspect of the tackily constructed apartments, though I had the feeling that the Booze Brothers were just hoping that none of the buildings would collapse during Ernest’s obligatory inspection. Finally, the time came to sit down in the Booze Brothers’ of- fice and see if we could structure a deal. The discussions went ex- traordinarily well, so much so that in a relatively short period of time Ernest was prepared in principle to buy the properties. When Ernest and I left Kansas City (with my making cer- tain that he boarded his plane before I boarded mine), all three entities—i.e., Ernest, the Booze Brothers, and The Tortoise—were in agreement on the general terms of the deal. Unlike so many nightmares of the past, it was not just the buyer and seller who had worked out a verbal agreement, while that unnecessary nuisance—the real estate agent—panted and dutifully waited in the reception room. I had taken charge from the beginning, and every step of the way my focus was on keeping a tight grip on the reigns so I would be in a position to get paid if the sale closed. It hadn’t gone unnoticed by me that, from the outset, Ernest seemed unusually anxious to make the deal. His public company was only a couple years old, but in the past 12 months or so he had made several major acquisitions. In studying his company’s

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 164

164 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

annual report, it was clear that if Ernest succeeded in purchasing the eight Kansas City properties, it would elevate his firm from a small, rapidly growing real estate investment trust to a serious force to be reckoned with in the real estate industry. For this rea- son, it was obvious that he wanted the deal badly. I therefore sensed that it was the right deal, in the right place, at the right time—and that I was the right tortoise, in the right place, at the right time. For a real estate agent, this is as good as it gets. First, you have to be prepared; second, you have to find the right opportunity; third, you have to come through at the mo- ment of truth. Most people get plenty of opportunities during their lifetimes, so that’s rarely the issue. What counts is how well prepared they are and how good they are at taking advantage of opportunities when such opportunities make their appearance. I had been blessed with many excellent opportunities in the past, but had blown them because I wasn’t prepared. That, however, was no longer the case. There was no way that I was going to al- low myself to be intimidated, because I was now dealing from a posture of strength. My image was excellent, and, of utmost im- portance, I had all three legal tools locked safely away in my files. In addition, I had done an outstanding job of securing all the information Ernest had requested in the performance of his due diligence, and I was now following through on every detail. Was it possible, I wondered to myself, that it was meant for me to return to Missouri—the state where the St. Louis debacle had occurred—to prove that I finally understood how to handle the master intimidators of the Businessworld Jungle? Could there ac- tually be justice for reptiles in a world infested by white-hatted humanoids? After a couple more weeks of hammering out the details via telephone, we all (again, me included) decided that it was time to meet in Kansas City and try to finalize the terms of a sale. This time, however, there were three additional parties involved in the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 165

The Return of The Tortoise 165

transaction: the Booze Brothers’ attorney, Ernest Ego’s attorney, and—you guessed it—The Tortoise’s attorney! By now, nothing that the expert from afar did could surprise either Ernest or the Booze Brothers, but it was difficult for their attorneys to fathom the idea of a real estate agent being repre- sented by an attorney at a closing. Truly, these were uncharted waters for Legalman. I of course went through the formality of properly acknowl- edging all of Legalman’s normal deal-killing goodies as “points” that would have to be “handled” so we could get on with the clos- ing. When appropriate, I stated (not asked) many ways that we (not just Legalman) would (not could) handle (not solve) the par- ticular points (not problems) in question. I also had some help in finessing my way around Legalman. As I pointed out, I had determined from the outset that Ernest was anxious to make a deal in order to speed the elevation of his company to a more exalted status. The price that he indicated he was willing to pay was, in my opinion, considerably in excess of the true market value of the properties. Interestingly, though, the price we had been discussing was still considerably less than the original asking price of the principals, which again emphasized the reality that a seller never gives his true price at the outset. Though they came across as “Aw, shucks” cowboys, the fact is that the Booze Brothers were no dummies. Above all, they were excellent actors, and they knew full well that the price we were talking about—approximately $2.7 million over and above the combined mortgages—was a golden opportunity to unload their cardboard-and-scotch-tape apartment complexes at a huge profit. Being superb salesmen themselves, the Booze Brothers, for effect, continued to cry the blues and complain about the price all through the negotiations. However, while putting on an admit- tedly convincing show, their desire to close the deal could be seen in their actions, and that desire was critical to my being able to offset the Attorney Goal Line Defense. I felt pretty certain that

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 166

166 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

behind closed doors they were tossing Legalman biscuits and trying to keep him in his cage. Oscar-winning performances of dissatisfaction notwithstanding, it was obvious that they were anxious to finalize the sale. I can’t tell you how much I enjoyed witnessing the Booze Brothers performances. I’d rather watch an experienced real es- tate developer hype, con, and lie his way through a deal than sit on the 50-yard line at a Super Bowl game. And when you’re lucky enough to get three of them together in one deal, they feed on each other’s performances much like great Broadway stars. To this day, I admire their professionalism (as actors, that is). Nonetheless, I felt secure with the Booze Brothers, because I recognized them as Type Number Ones. From the outset they had made it clear that the name of the game was to get the best possible deal for themselves, and I appreciated their candor. As I explained earlier, if you’re prepared when you deal with a Type Number One, he’s the least dangerous of all Jungle creatures. You always know exactly where you stand with him, which gives you the opportunity to implement whatever precautionary measures you deem necessary. The negotiations and legal documentation went on for three days, night and day, and had everyone walking around in a stupor from mental and physical exhaustion. On the second day, not- withstanding my strong posture, the Booze Brothers began to hint that there might be a need to perform the usual commissiondec- tomy. (Those readers who sell real estate for a living are no doubt familiar with the term commissiondectomy. It is a delicate surgi- cal procedure aimed at removing all or part of a real estate agent’s commission from his grasp. Sadly, most real estate agents practi- cally volunteer for this painful operation by leaving their com- missions unprotected and exposed to the avaricious appetites of Jungle predators.) The Booze Brothers pointed out that Ernest and they were still several hundred thousand dollars apart, with no apparent way of closing the gap. It seemed to them that the only way the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 167

“It’s getting harder and harder to remove these things from reptiles.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 168

168 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

deal could be put together was for The Tortoise to be more “rea- sonable” with regard to his commission, but I quickly assured all the parties that I had no interest in submitting to a commission- dectomy procedure. To my dismay, however, my tough stance did not seem to ruffle anyone, and I was pretty certain that I knew the reason for their confidence. All the parties were fully aware of two of the le- gal tools I had in my bag—signed commission agreements for the eight properties and certified mail registering Ernest’s company as the buyer—but they undoubtedly assumed that The Tortoise was not licensed to sell real estate in either Kansas or Missouri. Af- ter all, it would have been unheard of for anyone to have the fore- sight—let alone the willingness to spend the time and money—to fight his way through all the red tape, apply for real estate bro- kerage licenses in two far-off states, study the real estate licens- ing laws of those states, then travel thousands of miles to take the required examinations and become ordained by their state governments. No question about it, their assumption was reasonable. It definitely was unheard of for someone to go to such extremes— unless, of course, that someone was a relentless tortoise who had undergone a major commissiondectomy in the very same state less than two years earlier. Though I can never prove it, I have always felt certain that between the second and third days of our closing meetings in Kansas City, the Booze Brothers’ attorney, as a formality, checked with the Kansas and Missouri Real Estate Commissions to con- firm that I was not a licensed broker in either state. The reason for my belief is that the atmosphere changed dramatically when we met on the third day. Here they were—Ernest, the Booze Brothers, and their respective attorneys—in the midst of what ap- peared to be a routine commissiondectomy, when, on the third day, everyone suddenly seemed to be very concerned about my unwillingness to submit to the operation. As the hours passed, increasing time and attention were

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 169

The Return of The Tortoise 169

devoted to the commission “problem,” with more and more of the conversation being directed at my attorney and me. To their dismay, however, we didn’t budge an inch. I was absolutely fasci- nated by how an agreed-upon-in-advance payment for a job well done could be verbally transformed into a “problem.” I kept won- dering what word they would have used to describe the situation had I not produced a buyer for their Leggo-like properties. The attorneys worked into the early hours of the morning to get all the documentation in order and sort out all the legal details related to the sale of the eight major properties. Secre- taries typed away frantically, copying machines ran continuously, and a variety of strange people dashed in and out of the Booze Brothers’ attorney’s offices to sign mysterious documents. When we finally stopped working at the end of the third day, it was two o’clock in the morning and everyone was thoroughly exhausted. Ernest, the Booze Brothers, my attorney, and I went back to the motel where we were all staying. (The Booze Brothers lived in Lawrence, Kansas, but the closing was scheduled to take place in Kansas City, Missouri, so they, too, were staying over- night.) As we climbed the stairs on the way to our second-floor rooms, Ernest suggested that we all come to his room “to relax and kick around a few points.” Now, I might be a tortoise, but I’m not so slow that it wasn’t obvious to me that Ernest, following another grueling, 16-hour workday, had better things to do at two o’clock in the morning than just “relax and kick around a few points” with a trio of drunks and guy walking around with a shell on this back. As we climbed the stairs, I thought to myself, “This is it. You’ve waited almost two years for this moment. You’ve endured endless frustration and humiliation, but, in typical tortoise fash- ion, you kept trudging ahead. You studied, you analyzed, you planned, you followed through. And this time you’re prepared. It’s clear that the ball is going to go over the goal line; the only ques- tion is whether or not you’re going to get credit for the score. And that’s going to be determined by whether or not you allow your-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 170

170 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

self to be intimidated, make a mistake, and have the touchdown called back. You have to play it cool, remember that the only way to bluff is to not bluff, and have the self-discipline and determina- tion to do the right thing rather than yield to the temptation to act on emotion.” As I entered Ernest’s room, I reminded myself that nothing about this deal had happened by accident, and I mentally vowed that I would maintain control of the situation to assure that no last-minute penalties occurred. Before describing what took place in Ernest’s room, I should point out that there was another significant factor in this deal. In addition to the approximately 1,250 apartment units that made up the eight properties, Ernest and the Booze Brothers planned to enter into a contingent agreement for Ernest’s company to pur- chase nearly 1,000 additional units that were to be built in the near future. It was unclear as to whether I, as the licensed real estate agent who had initially brought Ernest and the Booze Brothers to- gether, would be entitled to a commission on these additional properties if and when a deal was consummated. When I had origi- nally discussed the eight properties with Ernest, I also pointed out to him the possibility of purchasing additional units to be built in the future, so I certainly had a reasonable claim to a com- mission on these properties. However, up until the meeting in his motel room, everyone involved, including myself, had conspicu- ously avoided talking about where The Tortoise stood with re- gard to the to-be-built units. After we assembled in Ernest’s room, the Booze Brothers went through a continuation of their Oscar-worthy performances about how much of their own cash they had put into the building of their apartment developments (even though later, many months after the closing, they laughingly told me how they had, in fact, overfinanced the projects—meaning that they had actu- ally put money into their pockets from the financing they had ob- tained for construction) and how they would barely realize a profit from the sale as it was now structured.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 171

The Return of The Tortoise 171

Ernest made it clear that he had already agreed to a higher price than he should have (and he was absolutely right), and ap- pealed to my rationality. There was no way that the deal could stand a $375,000 commission (3 percent of approximately $12.5 million). Surely The Tortoise would not blow up a sale of this magnitude by refusing to accept a commission in the range of $150,000 to $200,000. Real estate agents just weren’t supposed to make $375,000 on one deal. My impertinence was galling. Worse, I couldn’t even seem to conjure up the decency to feel guilty. It was, in fact, the defining moment that sooner or later ar- rives in every contest in life: To be or not to be intimidated? That is the question. Even though I still had a strong posture, in no small way aided by my having the right legal tools on my side, Ernest and the Booze Brothers were counting on my sanity and logic. Surely I would not be crazy enough to throw away the opportunity to earn a handsome, six-figure commission; surely I would see the logic in taking a $150,000 commission rather than no commission at all. But Ernest and the Booze Brothers knew nothing about my undergraduate days at Screw U. Or about my previous involve- ment in the Missouri Massacre. Or about my agonizing wait of al- most two years for this very moment to occur. Or about the fact that nothing in this deal had happened by accident. Or about my being well aware that this was the right seller and the right buyer in the right place at the right time. It was the perfect situation, one I had long dreamed about. It was time to put it all on the line. It was time to bluff by not bluff- ing. It was time to go for the touchdown and not be intimidated into settling for a measly field goal. It was time to suck it in and hang tough. My determination was unwavering. I had taken my stand, and there would be no backing down. I could almost hear the crowds chanting, “Green Power! Green power!” After repeated, vain attempts to try to get me to come to my senses, Ernest and the Booze Brothers began to get testy. Timing

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 172

172 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

is a critical factor in every deal, and I knew that the time was right for my now historic Tortoise Briefcase Address. In a dead- pan, matter-of-fact manner, I said, “Boys, there’s no sense going around in circles all night. It looks like we aren’t going to be able work this deal out, so let’s just write if off to experience. Hey, it’s not the last deal in the world.” I then looked at Ernest and said, “Don’t worry, I’m working on a lot of other properties. Sooner or later, I’ll come across a deal for you where the mathematics make sense.” Then I turned to the Booze Brothers and said, “As to your properties, I’ve been talking to several other prospective buyers, and I think I can crank up some serious interest in the next couple of weeks.” (You can just imagine how happy Ernest was to hear that.) I then put my papers back in my briefcase, closed it, and snapped the latches shut—very slowly—one latch at a time. Then I rose, smiled pleasantly, started toward the door, paused, glanced back over my shoulder, and, in the most cavalier manner, said, “Why don’t you guys get some sleep. I’ll be in touch with you in the next couple of weeks.” I was conscious of my every move and every word as I com- pleted the Tortoise Briefcase Address in a style that rivaled some of the Booze Brothers’ greatest performances. I will always re- member the distance—I was approximately three feet from the door—when Ernest and the Booze Brothers yelled out, in unison, “Wait!” That was the most telltale word anyone had ever spoken to me. That one word confirmed that I had been right all along— that this was the right buyer and the right seller in the right place at the right time. What Ernest had meant by that one word was that there was no way, after all the effort he had put into this deal, that he was going to miss the opportunity to propel his company into a sig- nificant real estate investment trust just because some real estate broker happened to be crazy. As for the Booze Brothers, the word wait was their way of saying that there was no way, after all the work they had done,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 173

The Return of The Tortoise 173

that they were going to miss the opportunity to pocket a $2+ mil- lion profit just because some real estate broker was too stupid to understand the consequences of his actions. Unbeknownst to either Ernest or the Booze Brothers, from the outset of this deal I had operated under the assumption that I would never receive a dime for the sale of the to-be-built units. First, I realized that there was at least a reasonable ar- gument that I was not legally entitled to a commission on those units. Second, I’ve never had any faith in contingent closings. How was I to know if the apartments would ever be built, and, even if they were, how could I be sure that Ernest would ever complete the purchase? And the way the Brothers Booze drank, how could I be certain that they would even live that long? (Sadly, one of them did pass away not too many years after the closing.) I again made it clear that there was absolutely no negotiation regarding my 3 percent commission for the sale of the eight prop- erties. However, “just as a matter of trying to help pull this deal together,” I said that I would consider taking an additional $50,000 cash right now in lieu of any future commission on the units to be completed and purchased at a later date. In other words, I was going to give the Booze Brothers (and, theoretically, Ernest) the opportunity to save several hundred thousand dollars (my potential commission) down the road by coming up with a mere $50,000 more right now. When Ernest and the Booze Brothers came out of the ether, the commission we finally agreed upon as a compromise was $426,901.39—about $50,000 more than the approximately $375,000 commission I had been shooting for. Let me tell you, that kind of compromise made up for a lot of past commissiondectomies. In the end, Ernest Ego and the Booze Brothers structured the Kansas City deal so there would be two closings, aside and apart from the contingent purchase of the to-be-built apartments for which I had agreed to forfeit any claims to a commission. Four of the properties were closed immediately, for which I received a commission of $221,446.50. The second closing, for the remain-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 174

174 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

ing four apartment developments, was set for two months hence, and would result in my receiving an additional commission of $205,454.89. When I had vowed to leapfrog to a new level and find a way to actually pocket what I earned, I had no idea that I would return to Missouri soil to make good on my vows. It was a great ending for what easily could have been a movie script. Happily, though, it wasn’t a script; it was real life. For the first time, I had experi- enced the thrill of a major victory over big-league intimidators. Driving over the bridge separating downtown Kansas City from the old airport, my commission check safely locked away in my briefcase, my attorney looked over at me and asked, “Well, how do you feel?” Without hesitating, I looked at him and replied, “Deserving.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 175

Chapter 16

The Return of The Tortoise: Part II

he second Kansas City closing, like all closings, had more Tthan its share of problems. For starters, much of the dirty laundry that normally comes to the surface just prior to a closing predictably did not show up until after the first Kansas City sale was consummated. With each new surprise, Ernest Ego became increasingly upset with the Booze Brothers and more hesi- tant about closing on the second group of apartments. About two weeks before the scheduled second closing, Er- nest’s attorney sent a letter to the Booze Brothers’ attorney in which he stated that before the second closing could take place, the dirty laundry discovered since the first closing would have to be rectified. He enclosed a copy of a letter from Ernest that listed no less than 29 unpleasant surprises he had been confronted with 175 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 176

176 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

since taking over the first four properties. I suddenly had visions of my additional $205,000+ commission going down the drain along with the Booze Brothers’ dirty laundry. The next day, Ernest’s attorney sent another letter to the Booze Brothers’ attorney, this one listing a number of legal and tax problems that he had discovered since the first closing. I had a feeling that Ernest’s attorney, at his direction, was reaching into his bag of deal-killing goodies to gum up the works, because Er- nest was probably looking for a way to back out of the second closing. From my standpoint, there was too much at stake to surren- der without a fight, so I rolled up my sleeves and worked around the clock to try to resolve the problems and pull the deal back to- gether. I employed every psychological tool at my disposal to try to keep peace between Ernest and the Booze Brothers. Things were becoming very heated between them, and the Booze Broth- ers made it clear to me that they felt they had a valid purchase agreement with Ernest for the second group of properties. They also made it clear that they were going to institute a massive law- suit against Ernest’s company if he did not go through with the second closing. I was experienced enough by this time to know that the worst possible way to try to get the other side to accede to your wishes is to make hostile threats, so I urged the Booze Brothers not to threaten Ernest with a lawsuit. I reminded them that there was big money involved, and that threats would only succeed in provoking Ernest into taking a tougher stand. If you push a per- son to the point where he feels that he has to stand his ground in order to save face—sort of a knee-jerk, macho response—emotion tends to overrule logic. I told the Booze Brothers that I would set up a conference call with Ernest, and that if we all kept calm and worked together, the “points” (that old standby word for “problems”) in question could be “handled.” I then made a separate call to Ernest and as-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 177

The Return of The Tortoise: Part II 177

sured him that the Booze Brothers were honorable people and had only the best of intentions. I said that even though the Booze Brothers had not mentioned the possibility of a lawsuit to me (which, of course, they had), I suspected that it was only a matter of time until Legalman would suggest that they institute legal proceedings if the second closing did not take place on schedule. I painted a gruesome picture of a New Yorker coming to Missouri or Kansas, or both—Booze Brothers’ turf—and trying to win a case against a bunch of “wholesome” country boys. I further reminded him what a great public relations roll his company was on, and that he should consider what a lawsuit might do to his company’s image. The first Kansas City purchase had given him a lot of favorable publicity, and the public was taking note of the fact that his company was growing rapidly. I opined that with the company’s stock climbing as it had been, the possibility of a major lawsuit and the attendant bad publicity could knock the props out from under its market value. In addi- tion, I pointed out that negative publicity could be a hindrance to his acquiring other properties in the future. Finally, I told Ernest that because the Booze Brothers were reasonable people, there was no question in my mind that the “points” he had discovered since the first closing could be easily “handled” if we worked together in a spirit of cooperation. I then let him know that I was going to set up a conference call with the Booze Brothers so we could proceed with ironing out the details. By giving the same pacification speech to both sides, I man- aged to diffuse a potentially explosive situation. I made each party believe that the mind-set of the other party was cooperative and reasonable, a mind-set they had not been willing to display when talking directly to each other. Now that I had changed their perceptions of each other’s attitude, I felt it was safe to move for- ward with a conference call. The call worked like a charm. During the discussion, both Er- nest and the Booze Brothers talked in a cooperative spirit, with no

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 178

178 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

sign whatsoever of hostilities. We calmly reviewed the 29 points on Ernest’s list and discussed the best way to resolve each item. Compromise proved to be the order of the day. It was agreed that as soon as the Booze Brothers had taken care of the items they promised to correct, the second closing would commence. Sure enough, within a week both sides were satisfied and prepared to close the second group of apartments.

There was another fairly significant change that took place be- tween the first and second Kansas City closings. The Leapfrog Theory had worked spectacularly well for me, and I was deter- mined to move onward and upward. Now that I had succeeded in leapfrogging over the rest of the pack, I wanted to go even higher, so high that future closings would be even smoother than my first Kansas City closing had been with regard to receiving my commission. And higher I went—about 41,000 feet higher. In a fit of youth- ful impulsiveness, I purchased a Learjet (on credit, of course)— long before Gulfstreams had become commonplace toys for every corporate executive worth his salt. My rationale for making such an elephantine purchase was two-pronged: (1) It would be an effi- cient tool that would allow me to be personally involved in many more deals simultaneously, and (2) it would add considerably to my posture and make it even more difficult for buyers and sellers to intimidate me. In retrospect, the former was a more defensible rationale than the latter, because there is no question that a private plane is a re- markable efficiency tool. As to my strong-posture rationale, how- ever, while my Learjet was an effective prop in this regard, from a cash-flow standpoint a private jet is a bit more suited to a Fortune 500 board chairman than a real estate agent. Nevertheless, being the young, impetuous tortoise I was, I financially obligated my- self to this overhead hog. My arrival for the second Kansas City closing was a real-life enactment of every real estate agent’s wildest fantasy. This was

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 179

The Return of The Tortoise: Part II 179

one time that I did not fly with the buyer to the seller’s city, nor did I even concern myself with arriving in Kansas City ahead of the buyer. By the day of the closing, both Ernest and the Booze Brothers had been made aware of the fact that the expert from afar had purchased a private jet, and I had made arrangements ahead of time to have them meet me at the Kansas City airport. (Try to get a buyer and seller to do that if you’re a real estate agent flying commercially!) The setting was like something out of a novel. Ernest and one of the Booze Brothers were sitting in the coffee shop of the main terminal at a table next to the window. Nicely, this gave them a perfect view of the airport’s main runway. There they were, drinking coffee and waiting for—of all people—the broker to arrive! A new precedent had been set for the relationship be- tween buyer, seller, and broker. Suddenly, from out of the clouds streaked a shiny, blue-and- white Learjet, its jet engines screaming through the skies as it descended toward the runway. Ernest Ego and the Booze Brother watched as my Learjet touched down, then taxied to a private aviation hangar. The expert from afar, who was really nothing more than a good real estate broker who had learned the art of handling intimidators, had arrived. The closing could now proceed. Need I say that there were no late-night motel-room discus- sions this time around? The closing went smoothly, and I walked away with another $205,454.89 as my commission for the second phase of the Kansas City sale. This time, as we went over the bridge on the way to the air- port, my attorney asked me, “Well, how do you feel now?” I thought about it for a moment, then looked at him and an- swered, “Gee, almost intimidating.” P.S. Not only did Ernest Ego never buy the second phase (i.e., the to-be-built apartments), but the Booze Brothers, who, not- withstanding their windfall profits, got into serious financial trouble shortly after the second closing, never succeeded in build-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 180

180 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

ing the additional units. Last I heard they were seen standing on a street corner and carrying signs that read: Will Develop Real Estate for Food. And Ernest Ego? Like so many real estate investment trusts of those early years, his company ultimately ended up in bank- ruptcy. Makes a guy wonder if having a good-paying job isn’t a better way to go.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 181

“Hey, guys, why not toss in the towel and give Hollywood a try instead?”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 182

Chapter 17

The Tortoise Dons His Hare Costume

fter the Kansas City textbook illustration of how to ap- Aply my reality-based philosophy to big-money deals, I inexcusably deviated from own rules and managed to find a way to get burned again. The setting for this sad Tortoise tale was Dayton, Ohio. It was obvious from the beginning that the main principal in the Dayton deal (“Mr. Biggshotte”) was a classic Type Number One, so there was no excuse for letting my guard down. It was a difficult deal, because I had to invest an inordinate amount of effort into getting my commission agreement signed, which should have alerted me to trouble on the horizon. After several discussions with Mr. Biggshotte, he informed me that his property was actually owned by a limited partnership and that he 182 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 183

The Tortoise Dons His Hare Costume 183

was one of the three general partners. He assured me, however, that he “controlled the deal” and that there would be no problem. When Mr. Biggshotte finally signed my commission agree- ment, he inserted a handwritten clause at the bottom of the last page that stated that the agreement was not valid unless executed by his two partners. He assured me that this was merely a “ges- ture of respect” so as not to offend his Washington, D.C., partner (“Sam Sewage”) by making it look as though he had entered into a deal without his knowledge. Mr. Biggshotte also assured me that Sam Sewage would do whatever he asked of him. Further, he told me that even if his partner refused to sign the agreement, he still possessed the legal authority to bind the partnership. The bot- tom line was that Mr. Biggshotte verbally guaranteed me that he would make the commission agreement valid with or without Sam Sewage’s signature. Mr. Biggshotte then called Sam Sewage and set up an ap- pointment for me to come to Washington to talk to him in per- son. The next day, I flew to D.C. and, shades of my early days at Screw U., spent a couple of hours sitting in Sam’s reception room, waiting for him to see me. Finally, my self-respect came to my rescue. I asked myself how in the world I had gotten into a situa- tion where I was again sitting dutifully in some rude monger’s re- ception room, waiting for him to bless me with a few minutes of his valuable time. Having come to my senses, I got up, walked over to the re- ceptionist’s desk, and asked her if I could use the telephone. I then called Mr. Biggshotte and told him that I was going to leave unless Sam Sewage met with me immediately. Mr. Biggshotte tried to calm me down, and assured me that he would call Sam as soon as I got off the line. Sure enough, within a few minutes Sam Sewage granted me an audience. I restrained my urge to spill a bottle of Liquid Paper on his powder-blue polyester suit, and instead suggested that we go over the details of the deal. After a few minutes of prefacing re- marks, I explained the commission agreement to him, but, to my

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 184

184 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

dismay, Sam said that he would need a day or two to study the agreement before signing. Though he emphasized that he didn’t see anything wrong with the agreement, he said that, as a matter of principle, he didn’t like to “rush into things.” I was pretty fed up after having to sit in Sam’s waiting room so long, particularly after traveling all the way to Washington, so I was not about to lower myself and try to pressure him into sign- ing against his will. Instead, I acted casual and told him to look over the agreement and get back to Mr. Biggshotte when he was ready to sign. On the way home, one of those fateful coincidences of life occurred. During an hour’s layover at the Pittsburgh airport (my Learjet was down for repairs), I bumped into none other than the third partner in the deal (“Eddie Enigma”). I was never quite cer- tain exactly what Eddie contributed to the partnership. He had no real estate expertise, had apparently done none of the work with regard to the financing or building of the project, and, I was told, had liquid assets that would make dinner at Taco Bell seem like a big night on the town. Mr. Biggshotte had simply told me that Ed- die was not a factor in the deal and that I should just ignore him. On the flight home, I told Eddie that I had just come from Washington and that, though Sam Sewage had not yet signed the agreement, he had assured me that he would do so shortly. I then showed him several copies of the agreement, which contained Mr. Biggshotte’s signature, and suggested that he also may as well sign it since it was not valid anyway until Sam Sewage signed. Surprisingly, Eddie Enigma actually signed the document as per my request, so I was now missing only Sam Sewage’s signa- ture. At this point, I was pretty confident, because all the evi- dence indicated that Mr. Biggshotte really was the one who was in control of the deal. Regardless, he had already promised me that he would honor my commission agreement even if Sam Sewage refused to sign it. As you might have guessed, after reviewing the agreement for a few days, Sam Sewage did, in fact, refuse to sign. Notwith-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 185

The Tortoise Dons His Hare Costume 185

standing, Mr. Biggshotte urged me to proceed with working on a sale of the Dayton property. He deleted the clause he had added at the bottom of the agreement regarding the other partners’ signa- tures, then initialed the deletion. (At a later date, I also got Eddie Enigma to initial the deletion.) Mr. Biggshotte explained that he and Eddie controlled more than two-thirds of the partnership, and, as a result, they had the legal power to bind it and enter into an agreement with me. Even though the agreement was not as ironclad as I would have liked, I decided to move forward with working on a sale of the Dayton apartment development anyway. There were three reasons for my decision. First, as I pointed out, from all indications it appeared that Mr. Biggshotte really was in control of the deal, which even Eddie Enigma had confirmed, and it was Mr. Biggshotte with whom I was dealing. Second, in order for a sale to be consummated, Sam Sewage would have to sign the closing documents, and his signing would be de-facto proof that he did, in fact, approve of the terms of the sale. Third, I was on strong legal ground, because I was licensed to sell real estate in Ohio, and, in addition, I planned to make cer- tain that there would be plenty of certified mail in my files as evi- dence of my involvement. In fact, the real estate laws of Ohio, like most states, protected the “procuring broker” even if he only had a verbal agreement. As always, I gathered extensive data on the property and put together an impressive package. This soon led to a serious inter- est on the part of the same company that had purchased the St. Louis apartment development where I had undergone my most painful commissiondectomy. My contact at that company (“Arnold Apathy”) was also the same person with whom I had negotiated the St. Louis deal, which should have been another red flag for me had I not been sleepwalking. After all, Arnold had spoken nary a word on my behalf when my Type Number Two

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 186

186 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

professor stuck it to me in the Missouri Massacre. Looking back on it now, it’s hard for me to believe that I moved forward with working on this deal with the knowledge that there were poten- tial problems with both the buyer and seller. My only excuse is that this took place many years before I had undergone my first brain-transplant surgery. It goes without saying that I sent the deal to Arnold Apathy by certified mail, and that I also registered his company by certi- fied mail with Mr. Biggshotte. Before inspecting the property, however, Arnold sent an outline of an offer to me, and asked that I have the seller sign it if it was acceptable. It was a reason- able offer—$800,000 over the mortgage, subject only to Arnold’s inspection of the property—and I was successful in getting Mr. Bigg- shotte to sign it. About a week later, Arnold Apathy came to Dayton to in- spect the property. It was the usual, meaningless staring at bricks, touring of bathrooms and laundry rooms, looking down garbage disposals, and opening closet doors. Arnold let it be known that he was satisfied with what he had seen, and at that point I thought we were headed for a quick closing. Mr. Biggshotte, who had let me know from the outset that he was in desperate financial straits, said that the only way he was interested in going through with the deal was if the buyer could close it right away. So, to expedite the handling of the myriad de- tails that would have to be taken care of before a closing could oc- cur, Mr. Biggshotte and I flew to New York a couple weeks later to meet personally with Arnold Apathy. It was during that New York trip that I began to get lulled into a false sense of security. Even before we went to New York, Mr. Biggshotte and I had become pretty chummy, and he continu- ally praised me for the great job I was doing in handling all as- pects of the deal. He told me point blank that he had never seen a real estate broker do such a thorough, efficient job and be so ag- gressive in moving a deal forward. In fact, he lavished so much praise on me that, much like my eternal nemesis The Hare, I

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 187

“Gosh––real, live bricks. I’m overwhelmed.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 188

188 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

began to relax and think to myself, “How sweet it is.” I hadn’t ex- perienced this kind of infatuation since my White Hatted profes- sor at Screw U. flunked me in Holier-Than-Thou 401. Another reason for our buddy-buddy relationship was that I liked Mr. Biggshotte’s candor. He didn’t exactly have a sterling reputation, which was understandable given that he was an ex- treme Type Number One who had no qualms about trying to grab both his and everyone else’s chips. During one of our conversa- tions, when he and I were chatting about business philosophy, he said to me, “Let’s face it, in business every guy grabs his best hold and goes for all he can get, any way he can get it. Everything else is B.S.” This hardly shocked me, considering what I had been through both during and after my days at Screw U. How could I deny that there was a certain amount of truth to what he was say- ing, considering my firsthand experience with disorganized crime in the Jungle. It wasn’t the way I wished things would be, but the way I had to admit they really were. During our New York trip, Mr. Biggshotte and I tied the bow around our friendship. He continued to praise me, and I contin- ued to lap up every word. Ignoring reality and displaying a shock- ing ability to rationalize away the facts, I figured I had nothing to fear, because I not only possessed an Ohio real estate license, a signed commission agreement with Mr. Biggshotte and Eddie Enigma, and plenty of certified-mail slips as proof of my involve- ment, I also had the advantage of knowing Mr. Biggshotte’s busi- ness philosophy. My impeccable lack of logic was analogous to a person deciding that even though he had advance word that armed bandits were going to rob a bank within the next five min- utes, it was safe for him to go inside because he was wearing a bullet-proof vest. About two weeks after our New York trip, Arnold Apathy sent me a purchase agreement for the Dayton property. To be sure, the fact that all mail and communications were being chan- neled through me gave me a great sense of security. Mr. Bigg- shotte continued to praise me for the outstanding job I was doing,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 189

The Tortoise Dons His Hare Costume 189

and Arnold Apathy displayed considerably more respect for my position in this deal than he had in the Missouri Massacre. It looked like a slam-dunk. As we got nearer to a closing, however, Arnold Apathy de- manded that Mr. Biggshotte supply a considerable amount of ad- ditional information. As usual, I took matters into my own hands and did most of the work. In fact, in this particular deal my staff and I took care of things that normally could be handled only by a seller’s own personnel. With his blessing, my staff virtually took over Mr. Biggshotte’s office and provided such information as rent rolls, tax bills, and a long list of other items that required ex- hausting hours and numerous trips to Dayton. Finally, the day arrived when Arnold Apathy was satisfied and ready for a closing. Because of Mr. Biggshotte’s desperation, the Attorney Goal Line Defense was almost nonexistent in this deal. Legalman probably figured that the only way he would ever get his bill paid by Mr. Biggshotte was to actually help (blas- phemy!) get the deal closed. Witnessing Legalman wave aside problems is about as common as viewing Halley’s comet. On the day of the scheduled closing, one of the more com- mon dirty-laundry problems surfaced. The insurance company that held the mortgage on the property refused to allow a transfer of the apartment development to the buyer. The insurance com- pany was unhappy with Mr. Biggshotte because of his delinquent mortgage payments, rent rolls they had found to be less than ac- curate, and a number of other questionable items. Here I was on the one-yard line, a commission of approximately $97,000 within my grasp, and from out of nowhere the insurance company was trying to gum up the works by refusing to allow the sale to go through. What to do? My old standby, of course: Take matters into my own hands. I flew to Cincinnati (where the insurance company was located) with my attorney and Mr. Biggshotte. What tran- spired at the insurance company’s office that day was like some- thing out of a soap opera. Mr. Biggshotte begged almost to the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 190

190 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

point of tears, but the insurance company’s executive henchmen stood firm. My attorney tried a tactful approach, but to no avail. I appealed to their powers of reason. Forget it. It was obvious that the boys in the blue suits didn’t have a great deal of sympathy for pathological real estate developers. It didn’t make any sense to me. Here was an opportunity for them to get rid of Mr. Biggshotte, Sam Sewage, and Eddie Enigma, all of whom they obviously disdained, and secure a sub- stantial real estate company in their place. So where was their logic? Foolish tortoise that I was, it didn’t occur to me that what the insurance company was angling for was quite simple: Blood! The next time you walk by one of those beautiful insurance- company skyscrapers, remember that all that glass and steel you see is held together by dried, human blood. These are the same in- surance companies who run those upbeat ads on television, the ones where their friendly insurance agents are always helping out some traumatized neighborhood family. Insurance companies may seem stuffy to most of us, but they know all the angles. They’ve been around since the Stone Age, and have seen every trick. In- surance-company executives know all about Mr. Biggshotte’s Jungle philosophy of grabbing your best hold and going for every- thing you can get. They also routinely crush hotshot real estate developers like Mr. Biggshotte without giving it a second thought. Finally, out of the goodness of their hearts, the insurance company’s foot soldiers decided that they were going to allow Mr. Biggshotte to donate a couple pints of blood in exchange for ap- proving the transfer of his property. After more begging, more tears, and more hard-luck stories, Mr. Biggshotte begrudgingly agreed to allow the insurance company to stick the needle in his arm and draw the required amount of blood under the euphe- mism of “mortgage transfer fee.” After we left the insurance company’s offices, Mr. Bigg- shotte, though bitter about being forced to make a donation to the insurance company’s blood bank, was also elated that the sale could now be closed. He had been on the verge of losing the deal,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 191

The Tortoise Dons His Hare Costume 191

but now it looked like it was going to be finalized. Mr. Biggshotte gushed all over me and my attorney, telling us how grateful he was for what we had done for him and that he would never forget it. To his credit, he admitted that without us he didn’t believe that he would have been able to get the insurance company to agree to the transfer. Bottom line: Without me, he would have had no deal, and the project would have ended up in Busted Proj- ects Heaven. Such gratefulness was pure ecstasy for me, so much so that I quickly stepped inside a phone booth and changed into my tat- tered hare costume, which I hadn’t used in years. It was like turn- ing against my own people . . . er, reptiles. There was no more need to be on guard, thought I, because any fool could see that the deal was in the bag. Rather than being focused on my commis- sion, one would have thought that my main concern was in see- ing to it that nothing got in the way of my flaming romance with Mr. Biggshotte. The gushing, the praise, and the back-slapping was so intense that it bordered on amorous. So much so that I told my attorney that he need not accompany us to the closing. I had, in fact, totally lost my mind! So off to Dayton I went with my new best friend, Mr. Bigg- shotte, who continued to talk as though he owed his very life to me. But, alas, this time it was I who went under the ether. Shades of my performance in Victor Vermin’s reception room in Cincin- nati years earlier: The last thing I remembered was waiting around in an attorney’s reception room, sucking my thumb and playing with my yo-yo while the closing was taking place in an- other room. Finally, Mr. Biggshotte came bustling out of the clos- ing room and announced that everything was “done” and that “we’re all going out to dinner to celebrate.” Swift-witted soul that I was, I asked Mr. Biggshotte, “Uh, what about my commission?” “Don’t worry about it,” my new- found best friend retorted, “I’m taking care of everything.” “Gosh,” I thought to myself, “and for a moment there I thought I might have a problem.” Mr. Biggshotte seemed so jubilant that I

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 192

“Hold up on the praise, sweetheart, while I slip into something more suitable for the occasion.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 193

The Tortoise Dons His Hare Costume 193

hated to do anything to dampen his spirits, so I decided not to press him. Mother Teresa would have been proud of my compas- sionate mind-set. All parties to the closing were at the victory celebration dinner—Mr. Biggshotte, Sam Sewage, Arnold Apathy, their attor- neys, and, yes, even Eddie Enigma. From my standpoint, Sam Sewage was the key to the deal, because by signing the closing documents, he, in effect, had made a legal representation that he approved of the sale. Even at the celebration dinner, Mr. Biggshotte continued to heap praise on me in front of everyone. I was so flattered that I was tempted to pull out my yo-yo and perform a couple new tricks I had learned in the reception room while everyone else had been busy with more mundane matters—like closing the sale. Everything was quite lovely until I happened to notice that the first course being served was turtle soup, which finally jolted me out of my sedation. It’s wonderful being invited to dinner, but not when you’re on the menu! Finally, it all started coming back to me—my years at Screw U., my past experiences in the Jungle, the defensive techniques I had developed. I reminded myself that I had been dealing with an archetypal Type Number One, a nasty Jungle predator who had made it clear to me from the outset that the name of the game was to get as many chips as possible by whatever means neces- sary. “Mustn’t panic,” I thought to myself. I had to find a way to talk to Mr. Biggshotte in private as quickly as possible. After about an hour, Mr. Biggshotte excused himself to go to the men’s room. This was my big chance. I, too, excused myself, but no one bothered to even acknowledge me. It’s as though I were invisible. My separation from the closing had been carried out with such grace and finesse that most of the celebrants proba- bly wondered what I was doing at the dinner. For them, it was a celebration; for me, it was the last supper. The men’s room wasn’t my idea of an ideal place to conduct business, but I had no choice. By this time, I had shed my hare

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 194

194 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

costume and, as a true tortoise again, was determined to get to the crux of the issue right then and there. It’s not easy to act ca- sual when you’re standing next to a urinal and watching someone relieve himself, but I tried my best. I told Mr. Biggshotte that I didn’t want to ruin his celebration, but that I had not yet received my commission. Then came the now-famous Dayton Men’s Room Address, which many scholars rank right up there with the Gettysburg Ad- dress and The Tortoise Briefcase Address I had delivered in Kansas City. Mr. Biggshotte smiled warmly, put his arm around my shoulder (without first washing his hands!), and said, “Listen, Arnold Apathy is holding up some of the funds for a few months pending my performance of certain conditions in the sale agree- ment. On top of that, the insurance company hit me with a sur- prise transfer fee this morning, so there isn’t a dime left to give you today. But as soon as we work out the other items, I’ll have enough to pay you.” Mr. Biggshotte had given new meaning to the word gall, considering the fact that, by his own admission, it was I who had saved him with the insurance company, and that had I not done so there would not have even been a closing! He then looked me in the eye—as his smile broadened into a toothy grin reminiscent of the Big Bad Wolf in his infamous ver- bal exchanges with Little Red Riding —and said warmly, “Don’t worry, I’ll take care of you (heh, heh).” On numerous occasions, in the months following the clos- ing, Mr. Biggshotte reiterated to me that I had done a fan- tastic job of selling his property and, in particular, saving him from the clutches of the insurance company. To his credit, he re- peatedly told me that I had more than earned my full com- mission. Notwithstanding his ongoing praise and admissions, however, he pointed out the facts of life—that because he had ter- rible financial problems, he could only offer me two alterna- tives: I could either wait until he “straightened himself out financially” (whatever that was supposed to mean) or I could file a lawsuit against him (in which case, he said, he would resort to

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 195

“Don’t worry, I’ll take care of you (heh, heh).”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 196

196 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

every dirty trick in the book in order to drag the suit out for three or four years). P.S. At my deposition, long after I had filed suit against Mr. Biggshotte, Sam Sewage, and Eddie Enigma, I drew a great round of laughs from their attorney, the judge, the court reporter, and even Mr. Biggshotte himself when I reiterated the latter’s final words to me in the men’s room, and added: “The trouble is, I wasn’t smart enough at the time to understand what he meant when he said he would ‘take care of me.’ ” The judge loved it, but, unfortunately, I wasn’t getting paid to entertain judges. Ultimately, we settled the suit for $35,000. At the time, I was bitter. However, in retrospect, considering the Jungle charac- ters with whom I was dealing, I think I was very lucky to end up getting even a third of my chips. Why had I agreed to the $35,000 compromise? First, Eddie Enigma had declared bankruptcy shortly after the closing, so I had no recourse against him. Second, it turned out that there was a clause in the limited-partnership agreement that, contrary to what Mr. Biggshotte had assured me, specifi- cally prevented him from entering into a contract for the sale of the Dayton property without Sam Sewage’s approval. It went without saying that Sam Sewage and Eddie Enigma would, on general Jungle principles, support Mr. Biggshotte in The Big Lie and claim that I had been notified of the existence of the sale- prevention clause prior to my working on the deal. Third, Sam Sewage pointed out that he had specifically refused to sign the agreement when I visited him in Washington, and, even though this was technically a moot point by virtue of his being a party to closing the sale, judges have been known to listen to irrelevancies on more than one occasion. Each of my commission agreements always clearly spelled out that whoever signed the agreement was doing so as an indi- vidual and assuming personal responsibility for any all commit- ments called for in the agreement, regardless of the actual owning entity. As a consequence, the only real hope I had was to

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 197

The Tortoise Dons His Hare Costume 197

go after Mr. Biggshotte, and I didn’t like the prospects of collect- ing from him. Indications were that he had been in financial diffi- culty since nursery school, and, from what I could gather, things were only getting worse for him. I had to consider the possibility that if the suit dragged on much longer, Mr. Biggshotte might join many of his fellow real estate developers and go belly up. In that event, I would have spent a great deal of additional time, energy, and money, and still not have collected a penny. I therefore decided to grab the $35,000 and chalk it up to experience. Shame on me. I had possessed a great image, I had managed to collect all the necessary legal tools, and I had exe- cuted my duties to perfection, all to no avail. In addition, I had recognized early on that I was dealing with a classic Type Num- ber One, so I felt I was fully prepared to handle his treachery. Nonetheless, when it came time to show my Tortoise stuff—when I reached the one-yard line—I blew it. I was so busy lapping up Mr. Biggshotte’s flattery that I committed an infraction on the touchdown play. And that, for an experienced graduate of Screw U., is indefensible. My attorney knew better than to ask me how I felt after the Dayton closing, but, if he had, I would have replied, “Dumb.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 198

Chapter 18

The Tortoise Returns to True Form

fter the Dayton fiasco, I was determined never again to Abe lulled into a mental lapse when money was on the line. I vowed that in the future I would move swiftly at the first sign of trouble. In my next deal, in which both the princi- pals and their properties were located in Memphis, I was wary from the outset, because I immediately spotted the two partners as classic Type Number Twos. There was no doubt in my mind that they were devious, and that they would try to separate me from my chips at the first opportunity to do so. One of the partners (“Bubba”), himself an attorney, was a habitual back-slapper—always laughing, joking, and telling you what a “good ole’ boy” you were—a wheeler-dealer who had little in common with the pure version of Legalman. Wheeler-dealer 198 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 199

The Tortoise Returns to True Form 199

attorneys either do not practice law at all or practice it only as a sideline, using their law certificate as a respectable front for maneuvering their way into business deals. The other partner (“Mumbles”) was an entirely different breed of Type Number Two. He simply mumbled his way inco- herently through every conversation, which made it easy for an alert-again tortoise to recognize that he was not to be trusted. What with being constantly slapped on the back and told that I was a good ole’ boy by Bubba and being periodically mum- bled at by Mumbles, I had all I could do to protect my flanks. I was, of course, licensed as a real estate broker in Tennessee, had a signed commission agreement with Bubba and Mumbles, and had made certain that plenty of certified mail went back and forth be- tween my office and the principals, so I was in a strong legal posi- tion. I also had the standard image factors going for me, including my flitting in and out of Memphis via private jet. Our original commission agreement called for a purchase price of about $1.2 million over a combined first-mortgage bal- ance of roughly $3.6 million, or a total purchase price in excess of $4.8 million. About a month after we signed the agreement, the company who had purchased both the Dayton and St. Louis prop- erties submitted a written offer of $950,000 (over the existing mortgages) for the two apartment developments. Arnold Apathy, who had been the point man for his firm on the Dayton and St. Louis deals, visited Memphis to inspect the properties, at which time the sellers informed him that a $950,000 offering price was too low. With that, Arnold departed Memphis, and the situation was left hanging. In the meantime, Ernest Ego, the head of the real estate in- vestment trust that had purchased the Kansas City properties, made an offer of $1.4 million (over the mortgages) for the Mem- phis apartments, but it was part cash, part stock. Trooping back to Memphis with Ernest, I succeeded in getting Bubba and Mumbles to sign a tentative agreement to sell at the $1.4 million figure. However, after Ernest and I left Memphis, Bubba and

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 200

200 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

Mumbles managed to nitpick and chisel to such an extreme that both Ernest’s $1.4 million offer and Arnold Apathy’s $950,000 of- fer dissolved before my eyes. Just about the time I was ready to throw in the towel on the Memphis deal, I was able to come up with yet a third prospective buyer, this one from Pittsburgh. I succeeded in getting one of the partners in the buying group to travel to Memphis and meet with Bubba and Mumbles. After many hours of negotiations, he re- turned to Pittsburgh to discuss the deal with his partners. Shortly thereafter, another one of the Pittsburgh partners came to Mem- phis, and he submitted a purchase contract that called for $1.075 million over the mortgages. However, the offer had a number of onerous strings attached to it, which resulted in Bubba and Mum- bles turning it down. About a week later, the Pittsburgh buying group upped its offer to $1.275 million, but the terms of the new offer were even more onerous than those in the first offer. Following the final Pittsburgh offer, Arnold Apathy stepped back into the bidding and raised his offer to $1 million. However, having witnessed how Bubba and Mumbles had a penchant for nitpicking and dragging things out, he was smart enough to at- tach an important condition: The offer had to be accepted within 20 days. Nonetheless, Bubba and Mumbles continued to resist, and, to my surprise, Arnold increased his bid yet again—to $1.1 million, but $200,000 of the purchase price was to be in the form of a 10-year second mortgage at the rate of 6 percent per annum. After a few more weeks of fiddling, Bubba and Mumbles managed to play all three hands against each other so clumsily that they ended up with no offers at all. Normally, if I was lucky enough to find just one serious buyer for a property, I felt I was in great shape. But in this case I had managed to bring no less than three buyers to Memphis, and all three had drifted away while Bubba and Mumbles continued to excel in the art of fiddle playing. I was becoming convinced that Bubba and Mumbles, either out of sheer stupidity or masochistic design, were intent on fid-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 201

The Tortoise Returns to True Form 201

dling their projects into bankruptcy. However, before officially writing the deal off as just another a bad experience, the tortoise in me decided to press on and present the deal to a few more prospective buyers. Incredibly, I was able to come up with yet a fourth prospect, this one from Cleveland. Which gave me hope, because compared to Cleveland, Memphis must have looked like the French Riviera to the buyer. Like the three previous prospects, the Cleveland buyer (“Gentleman Jim”) indicated that he, too, was prepared to make a trip to Memphis. I was starting to worry that I was getting pulled into wasting still more valuable time and money by making a fourth trip to the land of Bubba and Mumbles. I also wondered if they weren’t just getting some sort of perverse thrill out of having people make offers to them. In the end, though, persistence won out, and back to Memphis I went. And, lo and behold, after the usual ho-hum physical inspection, Gentleman Jim made a verbal offer of $1.1 cash over the mortgages. On this trip to Memphis, however, it became clear to me that Bubba and Mumbles were in even more serious financial trouble than I had originally suspected. In fact, after Gentleman Jim and I departed Memphis, I found out that Bubba and Mum- bles had made a special trip to New York in an attempt to revive Arnold Apathy’s offer. In an apparent state of panic in which the Memphis Muttonheads again tried to play all the prospective buyers against one another, Mumbles sent me a telegram from New York stating that he and Bubba would accept Gentleman Jim’s $1.1 million offer, but only on two conditions. The first condition—surprise!—was that I had to agree to cut my commission to $50,000. The second condition was that Gentleman Jim would have to make the $1.1 million verbal offer official by noon the next day. As I emphasized earlier, bluffing wealthy people is futile, because they have staying power. Gentle- man Jim, of course, refused to be hurried into an official acknowl- edgement, so there was no deal. A few days later, I received another telegram from Mumbles

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 202

202 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

(who was still wandering the streets of New York trying to put to- gether a deal) in which he informed me that he and Bubba were unilaterally canceling our commission agreement and that all the deals I had presented to them were officially off the table. Sure, Mumbles; whatever you say. (I’ve always been fascinated by unilateral proclamations that imply that the person making them has the legal authority of an emperor. Engaging in Napoleonic hallucinations is the sport of choice for real estate developers.) In the meantime, unbeknownst to Bubba and Mumbles, I succeeded in getting Gentleman Jim to put his $1.1 million offer in writing, so I had another major decision to make: Should I stop throwing good money after bad, or was my investment in Mem- phis already so great that I couldn’t afford to stop trying to put a deal together (aka “the previous investment trap”)? The irre- sistible aroma of money won out. I decided to try one more time, but promised myself that, regardless of the outcome, this would be the last trip I would make to Memphis. I explained to the now extremely panicked Bubba and Mum- bles that Gentleman Jim was very serious about going through with a quick closing on their properties at the $1.1 million figure, and that they had better get their act together if they wanted to bail out. That’s when Mumbles mysteriously and suddenly devel- oped the ability to speak clearly. He proceeded to let me know that, in fact, it had been my commission that had been at the root of blowing up each of the other deals. He went on to say that there was no way I could expect to make the $140,000 fee called for in our agreement unless I could get Gentleman Jim to come up to the original $1.2+ million asking price. (Of course, experi- ence had taught me that even if a seller believed that he would pay me my full commission if he got the price he was asking, he would still find a reason to argue that my commission was too high. In other words, it has less to do with selling price than with the seller’s mental illness.) Things were getting pretty ugly, but reality was emerging. I had to make a decision. I had already made an incredible six trips

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 203

The Tortoise Returns to True Form 203

to Memphis, including four trips with serious buyers, and had produced no less than four written offers. In each of the first three cases, Bubba and Mumbles had fiddled around until the offers had slipped away, and I was certain that the fourth offer was also about to go south on me if something positive didn’t happen very quickly. There certainly was no way that I was going to get lured into making another trip to Memphis, or even submitting the properties to another prospective buyer, if Gentleman Jim’s offer wasn’t accepted. Similar to my Dayton deal, then, I rationalized (that terrible word again) that if I could make any commission at all on this deal, I would look at it as found money. So, after several hours of negotiations, I agreed to lower my commission to $75,000 on a sale price of $1.1 million. We drew up a new commission agreement similar to our initial under- standing, with an added clause stating that Bubba and Mumbles agreed to accept a purchase price of $1.1 million from Gentleman Jim. It also called for them to pay me a $75,000 commission if the deal was finalized. Subsequently, Gentleman Jim formalized his $1.1 million of- fer, and we began working toward a closing. As we neared the closing, however, both my attorney and I began having difficulty getting either Bubba or Mumbles on the phone—a sure sign that storm clouds were starting to gather. Finally, on the Friday before the first closing (the sale was to take place in two stages, because the second of the two properties was not yet completed), my at- torney and I managed to get through to Bubba. He was his good old, jovial self, spewing out a nonstop series of good-‘ole-boy lines. He assured us that, as far as he knew, “everything was all set” and that he “didn’t foresee any prob- lems” with my commission. By then, however, it was easy for me to translate his assurances into meaning that I was about to be- come the victim of another commissiondectomy if I didn’t move fast. It was sort of like an NFL owner assuring the media that he has no intentions of firing his head coach—which, of course, really means that the coach is on the verge of unemployment.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 204

204 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

Given that Bubba was an attorney and that my attorney had already had several discussions both with Bubba and the attorney representing him and Mumbles in the sale of their properties, I thought it would be a good idea to rely totally on the Universal Attorney-to-Attorney Respect Rule. In a strategic move, I decided to send my attorney to the Memphis closing alone, figuring that my presence would just serve as an irritating reminder to Bubba and Mumbles that I actually had to be paid a commission. I fig- ured that my attorney should have no problem dealing with his counterpart in Memphis, given that the Universal Attorney-to- Attorney Respect Rule was honored throughout the world. At the closing, my attorney presented a copy of my signed commission agreement to Legalman, as well as to a representa- tive of the title company handling the transaction. Legalman then asked my attorney if he would please wait in the reception room so the buyer and sellers could talk in private. No problem. They then proceeded to give a whole new meaning to two words: gall and crooked. Unbelievably, all the parties worked in concert to close the deal while my attorney sat trustingly by himself in the reception room! Gentleman Jim, though sympathetic to my position, fol- lowed the Arnold Apathy line and pleaded buyer impotence—i.e., the matter of my commission was between the sellers and me. To his credit, he did insist that my name be inserted in the purchase agreement as the broker of record. However, the agreement also made it clear that it was the sellers’ responsibility to pay my commission, so, giving Gentleman Jim the benefit of the doubt, he may have naively assumed that it would be paid right after the closing. If so, he was wrong. My attorney, much like The Tortoise in the Dayton deal, had been caught sucking his thumb in the recep- tion room while the chips were changing hands behind closed doors. I had never considered the possibility of Legalman ignoring the sacred Universal Attorney-to-Attorney Respect Rule and bla- tantly deceiving a fellow lawyer.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 205

The Tortoise Returns to True Form 205

When my attorney called me and relayed the bad news, I re- member thinking to myself that no matter how careful I was, it was impossible to cover every conceivable way that a seller could think of to prevent me from collecting my chips. At this point, there was no question in my mind that the only limit to crooked- ness was a serial crook’s creativity, and real estate developers in particular tend to be very creative. The coup de grace came the day after the Memphis closing when I received a certified letter from Bubba’s and Mumbles’ at- torney proclaiming that our commission agreement was termi- nated for “breach” on my part, and that it was completely null and void. (Those Napoleonic proclamations never cease to amuse and amaze me.) It was obviously an absurd letter, but it was quite a learning experience. The letter was dated the day after Bubba had assured me and my attorney over the phone that “everything was all set.” It was postmarked Sunday (the day after it was writ- ten), making it obvious that the sellers had intended for it to arrive subsequent to the closing on Monday. In other words, while Bubba had been telling my lawyer over the phone that he “didn’t foresee any problems” with my com- mission, he and Mumbles had already been planning to send me a letter claiming that I wasn’t entitled to any commission at all. Then, at the closing, Bubba, Mumbles, and Legalman had eased my attorney out of the room and hurried through the proceedings before he could figure out what was happening. We’re not talking about Jungle creatures here; we’re talking Jungle lice. There’s a pretty ugly difference between the two. I had been through many repugnant situations—both during and after my days at Screw U.—but I had never seen anything quite like the shenanigans that were resorted to in Memphis. When it came to out-and-out, diabolical plotting in an effort to defraud, Bubba and Mumbles were in a class by themselves. I wasn’t shocked that the principals were trying to cheat me out of my commission; that’s par for the course in the real estate brokerage business. I was just awed by the extent to which these

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 206

206 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

two felonious organisms were willing to go to accomplish their objective. Because the Universal Attorney-to-Attorney Respect Rule had been violated, my attorney took the matter personally. He sent Bubba’s and Mumbles’ attorney a letter in which he stated, among other things, that the letter he had sent to me on the eve of the closing was unfounded and ridiculous, not to mention that it was far too late. In addition, my attorney admonished Legal- man for communicating directly with me when he was well aware that I was represented by an attorney. What’s the world coming to when you can’t depend upon the Universal Attorney- to-Attorney Respect Rule? The next step is all-out anarchy. It was my good fortune, however, that the sale of the smaller of the two Memphis properties had yet to be closed, and that the second closing could not occur until all construction and occu- pancy requirements were met. My attorney and I hired a bright young trial lawyer in Memphis to intervene before the second closing, and he proved to be aggressive and tough. He was suc- cessful in obtaining an attachment against the property involved in the second closing, for which I had to put up a bond. Unlike Dayton, I had moved swiftly, and, aided by a bit of luck, managed to avert a total catastrophe. I was able to salvage my reduced commission as a result of having the usual three cru- cial legal tools in my bag: (1) a real estate license in the state where the properties were located, (2) a signed commission agree- ment, and (3) plenty of certified mail in my files. In addition to suing Bubba and Mumbles, I also sued the title company. About a week after the suit was filed, I wrote a letter to the president of the title company in which I stated that I thought it was shameful that his firm would be a party to such blatant de- ception. I again put him on notice about the commission agree- ment that existed between the sellers and me, and enclosed another copy of the agreement. I also told him that I was holding him personally responsible for seeing to it that my commission was paid at the second closing. Obviously, however, he didn’t

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 207

The Tortoise Returns to True Form 207

give a hoot what a shell-shocked real estate agent thought, be- cause my commission was not paid at the second closing. The only thing that saved me was a court order that held up the proceeds of the sale. Shortly after the year in which I closed the Memphis deal, Bubba and Mumbles, undoubtedly out of fi- nancial desperation, made a $50,000 settlement offer. My Mem- phis attorney encouraged me not to be in any hurry to accept the offer, and I probably should have listened to him. However, the day before the first depositions were to be taken, I decided to accept it. Why? Again, I had examined the downside closely, and prag- matism prevailed. Bubba and Mumbles, like so many other devel- opers with whom I had dealt, were in shaky financial condition, to put it mildly, and I had to consider the possibility of both of them ending up in bankruptcy court. And if that were to occur, I probably wouldn’t be able to collect anything at all. I also had to consider the fact that the party in the wrong always has an advan- tage, that being the fact that the wheels of justice turn very slowly. In the meantime, the person in the right has to spend thousands of dollars in legal fees, travel expenses, and other re- lated costs. I had no choice but to face the reality that even if I won in court, I would likely net much less than the $50,000 being offered. Welcome to the Jungle, Mr. T . . . again. The Memphis tale of deceit is a perfect example of why I have emphasized that the main purpose of real estate licenses, brokerage agreements, and certified mail is to avoid lawsuits. If the person you’re dealing with decides to go for your chips, notwithstanding his knowledge of the legal tools you have in your bag, the reality is that you probably are still going to end up losing. At the very least, you will net a lot less than you would have made had it not been necessary to litigate. Bottom line: You either win in the Jungle or you’re unlikely to win at all. The Memphis deal also reaffirmed the fact that sellers— particularly Type Number Twos—will go to virtually any extreme to avoid paying a commission. In addition, it again reminded me

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 208

208 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

that—like insurance companies—banks, title companies, and other institutions have built their corporate empires on human blood, and that I should not allow myself to be lulled into a false sense of security just because established firms are involved in a sale. Finally, it put me on guard to the reality that Legalman was quite capable of participating in a devious plot against a fellow at- torney in an effort to do me out of my commission. Granted, this was an unusual role for Legalman, as he normally abides by the Universal Attorney-to-Attorney Respect Rule and just plays good, hard-nosed defense, but it was yet another Jungle danger to be on the alert for in the future. All in all, though, the Memphis outcome was a plus. I had spotted Bubba and Mumbles as Type Number Twos from the out- set, and had just played along with their phony act. I also had not only secured all the necessary legal tools, but, as was not the case in Dayton, once the sellers had begun to swing their axe, I pulled my hand away and took swift action. True, Bubba and Mumbles did manage to nip off the ends of a couple of my fingers, but at least I had been quick enough to walk away with sufficient chips to be able to afford a new paint job on my badly scarred shell.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 209

Chapter 19

The Ultimate Insurance Policy

y Dallas closing—the sale of two apartment develop- Mments totaling approximately 340 units—served as a model for the successful application of my reality- based philosophy. It was quick, smooth, free of anxiety, and there were no last-minute hitches. Two factors, in particular, were especially significant in this deal. First, I used my strong posture to persuade the seller to sign a commission agreement based on 51⁄2 percent of the total selling price rather than the 3 percent figure I normally used. After my Dayton and Memphis experiences, I was a believer; i.e., I as- sumed that every seller worth his salt would, at a minimum, try to at least whittle down my commission—regardless of where I started the “bidding.” 209 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 210

210 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

That being the case, I thought it would be interesting to see if starting out at a higher commission figure than I hoped to actu- ally receive would produce better results. When the inevitable commissiondectomy attempt began, I would then be able to af- ford to have my commission cut. It was just a matter soothing the seller’s sick mind. The important thing was for him to believe that he had succeeded in shafting the real estate agent who had committed the dastardly sin of selling his property for him (and probably saving his financial hide in the process), even if his be- lief was an illusion. The seller (“Paul Pervertte”) lived in San Antonio, but com- muted regularly to Dallas. My image was strong from the outset, and I developed an unusually good rapport with him. Shuffling Paul back and forth between Dallas and San Antonio on my Lear- jet didn’t do anything to hurt my image or rapport with him ei- ther. Just a year earlier, I may not have been able to get Paul to even sign a commission agreement. Now, with my Earth bro- chure, Learjet, and the addition of one other factor—a track record of having closed a number of verifiable, major deals—I not only was able to get Paul to sign an agreement, but one that called for a commission percentage nearly double that spelled out in my previous agreements. In fact, it was about 25 times greater than the percentage I had received in the St. Louis Massacre just a few years earlier. I was very conscious of the fact that it was not what I was saying and doing that made the difference in my ability to steer and control the situation; rather, it was my posture. Since our agreement contained an asking price of nearly $3 million, my commission was officially slated to be about $165,000. However, I always kept in mind that what I was actually shooting for was a commission in the area of $90,000 (based on 3 percent of the asking price). Further, I realized that if I was fortunate enough to conclude a sale, the final selling price, as in all sales, would un- doubtedly be considerably less than the original asking price. Sure enough, when money finally changed hands, the price

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 211

The Ultimate Insurance Policy 211

was closer to $2.7 million. (Technically, it was less than $1.7 mil- lion, because the buyer actually purchased only a one-half inter- est in the properties, then leased his half back to the seller.) My commission ended up being $100,000, or nearly 4 percent of the final purchase price and more than 6 percent of the full purchase price (i.e., the total value of the property based on the one-half purchase price). As a result, by starting out with a higher com- mission rate in my “written understanding” I was able to walk away with about $20,000 more than I would have made under my standard 3 percent formula. The second significant factor in the Dallas closing was that I had an additional insurance policy going for me to make certain I got paid. As usual, in addition to my commission agreement, I possessed the other two essential legal tools: a brokerage license in the state of Texas and plenty of certified mail going from me to the principals. More important, however, was the fact that I was dealing with a buyer (“Manny Moral”) who was willing to break the apathy barrier and insist that paying my commission be a condition of the closing. (The buyer was actually a real estate in- vestment trust of which Manny was the president.) There were many reasons why I enjoyed such strong support from Manny, but I believe the most important one was that he had the foresight to realize that it was to his advantage to see to it that I was treated fairly. Even though I had never completed a sale with Manny, I had submitted many presentations to him, and, be- ing a major buyer of properties, he was savvy enough to recognize that my work was very professional and that I could be an excel- lent source of properties for his trust. He had often indicated how impressed he was with the thoroughness and accuracy of my pre- sentations, and he appreciated my promptness in following up whenever he showed an interest in a property. It was an ideal situation, one that reminded me very much of the association I had enjoyed with my elderly Type Number One professor at Screw U. when I was in the second-mortgage busi-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 212

212 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

ness. I was beginning to see how the buyer-support factor could be powerful enough to offset even a lack of one or more of the es- sential legal tools in the event I was unable to acquire them. I had come 180 degrees from the point where I had been just a few years earlier. In the Dallas deal, I had every exit covered. Paul Pervertte had nowhere to turn, and, as a result, did not even at- tempt a commissiondectomy—which was a first. In fact, things went so smoothly that I was never even sure whether Paul was a Type Number One or Type Number Two. And it really didn’t matter, because by gaining the buyer’s full support I removed temptation from the seller’s grasp. Helping Paul Pervertte avoid sin was one of the most humanitarian acts I have ever performed. Also, since Paul was in the usual seller’s financial bind, I was able to extract excellent cooperation from Legalman. As a result, the closing went more smoothly than I ever could have imagined. It was by far the quickest sale I had ever made, with less than three months elapsing between the time my commission agree- ment was signed and the actual closing. Though it was obvious to me that I had Manny’s full support, I nonetheless brought my attorney along to the closing. Manny had assured me that it wasn’t necessary, but I was glad that I did, because it also gave my attorney the opportunity to develop a good relationship with Manny, which in turn made future clos- ings even easier to handle. After all the papers had been signed and the closing was wrapped up, I left Dallas to tend to another deal while my attorney stayed behind to collect my fee. And this time, he did. What a difference a good relationship with the seller had made, and what a difference a good posture had made in en- hancing that relationship. When my attorney remitted the commission check to me, he enclosed a letter in which he pointed out that, because of some of the usual last-minute contingencies, Manny’s attorney had wanted to escrow $100,000 from Paul’s proceeds and $25,000 from my commission. Manny, however, had insisted that none of my money be held back. My attorney closed the letter by saying,

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 213

The Ultimate Insurance Policy 213

“. . . (this) indicates to me that he (Manny) certainly thinks a good deal of you.” That statement summed up my current posture in a nutshell. Although I couldn’t count on having such a great insur- ance policy in every future closing, in the Dallas deal I felt I had achieved the optimum posture for a real estate agent. Not very exciting to write about, but I only wish that all my previous closings, as well as the scores of deals that didn’t close, had been just as unexciting. Of course, had that been the case, I would not have had the material to write this book. What creates excitement is problems—excitement you don’t need if you’re looking to be paid a commission. In Dallas, I had pulled $100,000 worth of chips off the table without even getting so much as a manicure. As a result of this unique experience, it was now clear to me that the easiest way to win against intimidating sellers was to put a great deal of effort into forming good relationships with buyers.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 214

Chapter 20

Sticking with a Winning Formula

y next closing, in Omaha, followed quickly on the Mheels of my Dallas success. This time around, I wasn’t able to negotiate an agreement with the higher-than- usual commission rate I had secured in the Dallas deal, but I was again working with Manny Moral, so I felt comfortable. In addi- tion to having the support of the buyer, there were three other significant factors in the Omaha deal. First, it was a complicated sale, not only because there were 15 properties involved, but also because it was structured similar to the Dallas deal; i.e., it was technically a purchase of a one-half interest in the properties on a sale-leaseback basis. In Omaha, the deal called for Manny’s company to pay $1.3 million for a 50 per-

214 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 215

Sticking with a Winning Formula 215

cent interest in the properties, then lease its half back to the seller (“Scott Scamm”). The second significant factor in Omaha was that even though the sale price was technically only about one-half of the original asking price, and even though my commission agreement called for only 3 percent of the total selling price, I was able to get paid on the basis of a 100 percent sale rather than the 50 percent sale that was technically concluded. Since Scott had legally sold only a one-half interest in his 15 properties, the real selling price was more in the area of $4.5 million rather than the $9 million+ ask- ing price that was stated in my commission agreement. Accord- ingly, he could have made a good argument that my commission should be only 3 percent of approximately $4.5 million, or about $135,000. But because I had the full support of the buyer, I was able to collect a commission of $238,000. That’s an additional $103,000 just for putting in the time and effort to initiate and maintain a good relationship with Manny Moral. So, by having completely reversed the roles of intimidator and intimidatee, I was able to perform a “reverse commissiondec- tomy” on the seller; i.e., I received a commission check that was actually higher than the commission that was spelled out in my agreement. It was a delicious triumph, especially considering the fact that I didn’t have the advantage of having a 51⁄2 percent com- mission rate in my brokerage agreement as I did in the Dallas deal. My rationale for insisting that my commission be based on a 100 percent sale price was that both the buyer and seller were fully aware that the sale of a one-half interest was merely a struc- turing convenience and that, for all practical purposes, Manny Moral’s company was really buying the properties outright. Fur- ther, I had done the same amount of work as if the deal had been closed on a 100 percent-sale basis, so I saw no reason why I should be penalized as a result of structuring technicalities. In fact, there were a number of stipulations in the purchase agreement whereby Manny’s company could end up owning the

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 216

216 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

other half of the properties, either through default or by purchas- ing them at a very low price. And, as you might have guessed, de- fault is precisely what ended up happening. The third significant factor in Omaha was that I ran into a new variety of Type Number Two. When you categorize people into just three group types, you obviously get many subtle varia- tions within each group. In the case of Omaha, the seller, Scott Scamm, was a “dumb as a fox” Type Number Two. He was a bear- like figure—probably 240 pounds or more—and came across as a very docile, nice guy, always scratching his head and professing to be confused. (Was it possible, I wondered, that he and Mum- bles may have evolved from a common ancestral tree of horse thieves?) The dumb act is a disarming, tried-and-true gimmick that tends to relax the opposition, because a person who uses it does not pose a visible threat to his targets. Scott also had another tool that he employed with perfec- tion. Not only was he a huge man, and not only did he appear to be docile and confused, he also spoke with a thick Baltic ac- cent. This was the real clincher, because—and perhaps this is a result of American arrogance—U.S. folks tend to make the mis- take of assuming that someone with a foreign accent isn’t sharp. As it turned out, though, Scott was one of the most cun- ning, clever people I would encounter in the real estate busi- ness. It was a great learning experience for me, and one in which I was again able to earn while I learned. After getting Scott to sign my commission agreement, I left two of my secretaries behind in Omaha to gather the material needed to do presentations on the 15 properties. About a month later, I registered the eventual buyer—Manny Moral’s real estate investment trust—with Scott. Shortly thereafter, I flew to Mil- waukee to pick up Manny in my Learjet, and we cruised down to Omaha for another one of those thrilling episodes of brick staring. Fortunately, it was summer, so Omaha was still accessible to aircraft. During most of the winter, Omaha looks like a throw-

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 217

Sticking with a Winning Formula 217

back to the Ice Age. Even Cleveland starts to sound tropical if you spend too much time in Omaha in the winter. So, taking advan- tage of the nice weather, I suggested that Manny, Scott, and I view the 15 properties from my Learjet. If you’ve never flown on a Learjet, there’s no way you can ap- preciate how ill-advised my suggestion turned out to be. The in- side of a Learjet is about the size of a coffin; I mean, if you’re over 10 years of age, there’s no way you can stand up in a Learjet. About the only movement it was intended to allow for is scratch- ing your ear. Nonetheless, there we were, buzzing over Omaha at an al- titude of just a few hundred feet, with the massive, 240-pound Scott Scamm—comically reminding me of Brer Bear—hurling him- self from one side of the plane to the other and shouting, in his thick Baltic accent, that we were just coming over . . . no, we were just going over . . . no, we had just passed over another one of his properties. Just about the time Manny or I would be getting to the window through which he was pointing, Scott would be lunging to the other side of the plane, usually resulting in a “shall we dance” type of collision situation on our knees. It’s a wonder the plane didn’t roll over. I darn near cracked my shell getting slammed around between Brer Bear and the sides of my flying coffin. After we landed, Manny and I, bruised and battered, contin- ued our tour of the 15 properties on the ground. That, however, turned out to be an even worse experience. Scott drove us from project to project, and the ride was more frightening than our Learjet tour had been. (That night I had a nightmare that I was driving in heavy traffic in a small town in Lithuania, and all the other cars on the road were being driven by clones of Scott Scamm. Terrifying!) After the normal back-and-forth hassling, including a coura- geous goal-line stand by Legalman, we managed to get the deal closed on the 50 percent sale-leaseback basis. Having had proof in Dallas that I had Manny’s full support, I did not even bother to

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 218

“Du . . . vee jus paz over annuder vun of mine properties.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 219

Sticking with a Winning Formula 219

attend the closing. Instead, I had my attorney collect the $238,000 commission check for me while I was off working on other deals. I could not help but recall how just a few years earlier I had startled everyone in that first deal in Cincinnati by showing up at the closing with my own attorney. Now, working from a posture of strength—which included the full support of the buyer—not only was it taken for granted that my attorney would be at the closing, it was not even necessary for me to take the time to be there myself. Omaha was the last sale I closed during the first 12-month period in which I implemented my reality-based philosophy, and it was a perfect note on which to end the year’s work. By this time, the Earth brochure, the Learjet, and a track record of many major closings had become my trademarks. Groveling around on my hands and knees for bones now seemed a distant nightmare to me. In Omaha, I had again proven to myself, beyond a shadow of a doubt, that it wasn’t what a person said or did that mattered, but what his posture was when he said or did it. Understanding the reality of the Theory of Intimidation and the Posture Theory had led to the ultimate in real estate broker- age: the performance of a “reverse commissiondectomy.” I love you, Manny.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 220

Chapter 21

Answer: NOT to Be Intimidated

isplayed on the following page is a summary chart of the Ddeals I’ve described in the previous six chapters. Though all these sales were closed during the first year follow- ing the implementation of my reality-based philosophy, it’s im- portant to realize that they represent only a small fraction of the total number of deals that I worked on during that time period. As everyone who has had any experience in selling knows, the law of averages is a salesman’s best friend. No matter how good you are, you will only close a small percentage of your deals. It therefore logically follows that having as many deals in the hop- per as possible will directly affect the number of deals you close. Without an understanding of the Theory of Sustenance of a Positive Attitude through the Assumption of a Negative Result, 220 mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 221 Sale Commission Approximate Gross $27,100,000 $849,901.39 City Description of Real Estate Price Received Kansas City #1Kansas City #2Dayton 4 apartment developments Memphis 4 apartment developments Dallas $ 6,500,000Omaha 6,000,000 $221,446.50 1 apartment development 2 apartment developments*The actual values of the Dallas and Omaha properties were closer to $2,700,000 and $7,700,000, 205,454.89 only one-half of the mortgage balances were used in calculating the sales prices, However, respectively. 2 apartment developmentsbecause the buyer originally purchased only a one-half interest in these properties. Based on the higher 15 apartment developments 4,500,000 4,000,000values, the approximate total of all sales was $31,400,000. 1,600,000* 4,500,000* 50,000.00 35,000.00 100,000.00 238,000.00

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 222

222 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

it’s unlikely that I would have closed even one of the deals listed in this chart. The disappointment and frustration I endured in working on the scores of properties that did not close would have totally discouraged me had it not been for my understanding of the reality that most deals do not close because of factors beyond one’s control. In other words, I came to view bad endings as nothing more than temporary setbacks, as just part of the game. One of the most important words when it comes to mental-health mainte- nance is “next.” It doesn’t matter whether you’ve been shafted in a business deal or jilted by a sweetheart, developing the mental toughness to say to yourself, “Next,” will give you a new outlook on life. Given that so many things in most people’s lives have a habit of not working out as planned, I believe that one of the most important keys to happiness is having the ability to move on. Once I had developed my reality-based philosophy, I realized that my success or failure would rest more on the implementa- tion of the Theory of Reality than on any other factor. (Reality is neither the way you wish things to be nor the way they appear to be, but the way they actually are. Either you acknowledge reality and use it to your benefit, or it will automatically work against you.) This is the theory that proved to be the founda- tion for the rest of my philosophy. Without it, all my other theo- ries combined would not have given me the results I obtained, nor could the perfect implementation of the operational tech- niques I developed have led to success. The failure to recognize and acknowledge reality is a lethal problem, because you cannot take proper action unless you correctly perceive the facts. It was my relentless pursuit of reality—my determination to recognize and acknowledge truth no matter how unpleasant it might be for me to do so—that was most responsible for my being able to turn the tables on the intimidators who coveted my chips. Only after I had correctly analyzed the brutal nature of the Businessworld Jungle was I able to structure a reality-based

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 223

Answer: Not to Be Intimidated 223

philosophy and techniques for putting that philosophy into ac- tion. This is what allowed me to benefit from reality rather than allowing it to work against me. As a natural consequence of my reality-based philosophy, all my techniques were directly or indirectly aimed at the most im- portant reality of all: No matter how well I performed my job, no matter how many deals I closed, the bottom line was getting paid. It was reality that had led me to this fifth step of what I had always heard described as “the four steps of selling.” One last time in honor of all those brave, fallen comrades—real estate agents who lost their dignity, fingers, and, in some cases, entire hands on the battlefields of far off enemy strongholds like Oma- ha, Dayton, and Memphis: Closing deals is not the name of the game; it’s only a means to an end. One’s exit strategy must be fo- cused on walking away with chips in one’s hand. In every area of life—whether business or personal—getting paid is the bottom line. If you think this applies only to real estate brokerage, you missed the book. In that event, return to page one immediately and start reading again—slowly this time. Like most people I had known over the years, I had often been guilty of ignoring the realities of the Businessworld Jungle because I had difficulty accepting their brutal nature. What I finally came to realize, however, was that whether or not I ac- cepted them did not change the fact that they existed. It wasn’t until I forced myself to stop being an ostrich and acknowledge reality that I was able to start making serious headway in the Jun- gle. Relative to many of the childish rules taught in numerous how-to and success books, the realities of the Jungle may seem brutal; relative to the devastating consequences that are likely to result from following such naïve prose, however, the realities of the Jungle don’t seem all that bad. When I look back on Jungle characters like my Type Number Three professor in my first deal in Cincinnati, Mr. Bigshotte in Dayton, Bubba and Mumbles in Memphis, and Scott Scamm in

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 224

224 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

Omaha, I can’t help but experience a warm feeling of nostalgia. What the heck, they were just taking their best intimidation shots at me, which is how indigenous creatures fight for their place on the Jungle food chain. It’s all part of the game. Me? I keep reminding myself of the Ice Ball Theory and try to remember that business is just a game within the bigger game of life. And when you’re playing a game, it’s amateurish to be mad at your opponent just because he outwits you. I guess I still have a perverse admiration for all those Type Number Ones, Twos and Threes who made so many big plays against me. All they were trying to do was win by the rules of the game. It’s just that the game happens to be played in a jungle—the Businessworld Jungle— and the rules are pretty loose. On the other hand, just because you admire an opponent’s ability doesn’t mean you should help him get more of your chips. Believe me, Jungle creatures love it when someone is ig- norant enough to give them help, but they certainly don’t expect it. On the contrary, they assume that you will always do what’s in your best interest, so why disappoint them? Unfortunately, one of the realities of the Businessworld Jun- gle is that no matter how well you do your job, you don’t neces- sarily get what you deserve. If you think otherwise, you may well end up turning into a cobweb-covered skeleton waiting for your commission check to arrive. Remember, looking out for your own interests does not conflict with your doing a good job for the person who is supposed to pay you. All you’re doing is helping him to not “forget” about your cut. Regardless of what some Jun- gle predators would like you to believe, you do have a right to be fully compensated for your services, so never allow a master in- timidator to con you into thinking otherwise. Nor should you feel contempt for Legalman. You must understand that he is not singling you out when he kills your deal. If there’s one thing Legalman is not, it’s prejudiced. He doesn’t discriminate when it comes to killing deals. Though it

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 225

Answer: Not to Be Intimidated 225

may not seem like it when it’s your deal that’s in his crosshairs, the truth of the matter is that he’s just as happy to kill the next guy’s deal as yours. So if Legalman should be successful in stop- ping you on downs at the one-yard line, be a good sport about it and give him his due credit—but, for goodness sakes, be sure to develop a strategy for neutralizing him in your next encounter.

People have often asked me how they can tell whether or not they are properly coping with intimidation. To help each reader determine the answer to this question for himself, I have de- signed the following test. (I am honored to tell you that the board of regents at Screw U. is seriously considering adopting this test as part of the school’s curriculum.)

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 226

226 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

HOW WELL ARE YOU HANDLING THE IMTIMIDATORS IN YOUR LIFE?

1. Do you often get invited to dinner, only to discover that you’re the first course on the menu?

2. Do you ask Legalman’s permission before going to the rest room?

3. Are you working longer and harder hours, but just getting older?

4. Are you in awe of people who wear white hats?

5. Do you often ask your mirror:

Mirror, mirror On the wall, Who has the most positive attitude Of them all?

... only to have your mirror answer back: “Spare me.”

6. Do you find yourself panting whenever a Court Holder enters the room?

7. Do you often wake up in reception rooms only to find that you’ve been sucking your thumb and playing with your yo-yo?

8. Did you go to the last costume ball dressed as a hare?

9. Do you walk around feeling secure because so many people have told you, “Don’t worry, I’ll take care of you?”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 227

Answer: Not to Be Intimidated 227

10. Have you noticed your fingers getting shorter and shorter each year?

11. When your house went up in flames and the firemen came crashing through to save you, were you sitting in your fa- vorite arm chair calmly playing the fiddle?

12. Do you become easily infatuated when someone tells you what a great job you’re doing?

13. Do you find yourself bluffing more but walking away with less?

14. When you were a little boy, did you always want to grow up to be a good ole’ boy?

15. Do you bark a lot at closings?

Grading scale: If you answered either yes or no to any of the above questions, you flunked. Why? Because it was a trick test. I just wanted to see how seriously you take yourself. My hope is that, at the very least, I succeeded in this book in get- ting you to think about the Ice Ball Theory. No matter what your feeling is about the rest of my philosophy, you salvaged something from these pages if you can accept the reality that nothing you do is going to matter much 50 billion years from now anyway. (In fact, with all due respect, it’s not going to matter much 50 years from now.) So relax . . . chill out . . . don’t take yourself so se- riously. And remember, above all, it’s just a game.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 228

228 To Be or Not to Be Intimidated?

Oops! Gotta be running along now; just saw an opening to the left of some hare out there in the Jungle; have to keep moving while he’s still daydreaming. Maybe I’ll be seeing you around the Jungle from time to time, and perhaps we can reminisce about our undergraduate days at Screw U. and trade Legalman stories.

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com mnit$$1.qxd 8/11/06 2:45 PM Page 229

“Gotta go now. Maybe I’ll be seeing you around the Jungle from time to time.”

Copyright © Robert J. Ringer 2006 www.robertringer.com